Powerdrive MD2: Commissioning Manual

Commissioning manual
Powerdrive MD2
Référence : 4617 en - 2020.07 / h

NOTE
LEROY-SOMER reserves the right to modify the characteristics of its products at any time in order to incorporate the latest
technological developments. The information contained in this document may therefore be changed without notice.
CAUTION
For the user’s own safety, this variable speed drive must be connected to an approved earth ( terminal).
If accidentally starting the installation is likely to cause a risk to personnel or the machines being driven, it is essential to comply
with the power connection diagrams recommended in the drive installation manual.
the motor to stop. The removal of the causes of the shutdown can lead to restarting, which may be dangerous for certain machines
or installations. In such cases, it is essential that the user takes appropriate precautions against the motor restarting after an
unscheduled stop.
The variable speed drive is designed to be able to supply a motor and the driven machine above its rated speed.
If the motor or the machine are not mechanically designed to withstand such speeds, the user may be exposed to serious danger
resulting from their mechanical deterioration. Before programming a high speed, it is important that the user checks that the
installation can withstand it.
The variable speed drive which is the subject of this manual is designed to be integrated in an installation or an electrical machine,
and can under no circumstances be considered to be a safety device. It is therefore the responsibility of the machine manufacturer,
the designer of the installation or the user to take all necessary precautions to ensure that the system complies with current
standards, and to provide any devices required to ensure the safety of equipment and personnel.
LEROY-SOMER declines all responsibility in the event of the above recommendations not being observed.
........................................
This manual only describes the commissioning and configuration of the Powerdrive. For additional information about
installation, product characteristics and warnings, refer to the installation manual for the relevant product.
Manual corresponding to software versions higher than or equal to 5.80
2 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
SAFETY AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
(In accordance with the low voltage directive 2014/35/EU)
The variable speed drives contain parts which are sensitive to

• Throughout the manual, this symbol warns of
electrostatic stresses and may be easily damaged if handled
consequences which may arise from
incorrectly. Electrical components must not be exposed to
inappropriate use of the drive, since electrical
mechanical damage or destruction (risks to health!).
risks may lead to material or physical damage as well as
constituting a fire hazard.
When work is performed on variable speed drives which are
1 - General powered up, the national accident prevention regulations
Depending on their degree of protection, the variable speed must be respected.
drives may contain unprotected live parts, which may be The electrical installation must comply with the relevant
moving or rotating, as well as hot surfaces, during operation.
protection via fused circuit-breaker, connection of protective
faulty installation or inappropriate operation could represent a conductor). More detailed information is given in the manual.
serious risk to personnel and equipment. Instructions for an installation which meets the requirements
For further information, consult the manual. for electromagnetic compatibility, such as screening, earthing,
All work relating to transportation, installation, commissioning
and maintenance must be performed by experienced, conductors, are given in the documentation supplied with the
variable speed drives. These instructions must be followed
in all cases, even if the variable speed drive carries the CE
installation and accident prevention). mark. Adherence to the limits given in the EMC legislation is
the responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or the
persons competent to install, mount, commission and operate
machine.
6 - Operation
2 - Use
Installations in which variable speed drives are to be
Variable speed drives are components designed for
integrated
integration in installations or electrical machines.
monitoring devices as laid down in the current relevant safety
When integrated in a machine, commissioning must not take
regulations, such as the law on technical equipment, accident
with directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive). It is
speed drives using control software are permitted.
Active parts of the device and the live power connections
stipulates in particular that electrical actuators (which include
must not be touched immediately after the variable speed
variable speed drives) cannot be considered as circuit-
drive is powered down, as the capacitors may still be charged.
breaking devices and certainly not as isolating switches.
Commissioning can take place only if the requirements of the
must be observed.
Permanent magnet motors generate electrical energy while
are met.
running, even when the drive is switched off. In this case, the
The variable speed drives meet the requirements of the Low
drive continues to be powered by the motor terminals. If the
load is capable of turning the motor, a switching device must
be provided upstream of the motor to isolate the drive during
maintenance operations.
The technical characteristics and instructions concerning the
During operation, all doors and protective covers must be
kept closed.
documentation provided must be observed without fail.
7 - Servicing and maintenance
All instructions concerning transportation, storage and correct Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
handling must be observed. See the Maintenance section in this document.
be observed. This manual is to be given to the end user.
4 - Installation
The installation and cooling of equipment must comply with
the
The variable speed drives must be protected against any
excessive stress. In particular, there must be no damage
components during transportation and handling. Avoid

touching the electronic components and contact parts.
Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 3

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
CONTENTS
1 - INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 7
2 - PARAMETER-SETTING INTERFACE ................................................................................................................. 7
2.1 - Presentation ................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2 - Interface architecture .................................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.1 - «Informations» page................................................................................................................................................
2.2.2 - «Reading mode» page ............................................................................................................................................
«Setting» page ........................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.2.4 - Keypad control ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
«Trip history» page ................................................................................................................................................ 16
2.2.6 - «Stop/Reset» function ........................................................................................................................................... 17
Communication loss alarm......................................................................................................................... 17
3 - PARAMETER-SETTING SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................... 17
4 - QUICK SETUP MODE ........................................................................................................................................ 18
4.1 - List of parameters ......................................................................................................................................
4.2 - Explanation of parameters .........................................................................................................................
4.2.1 - Symbols and abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................
4.2.2 - Accuracy and resolution ........................................................................................................................................
Basic control of the variable speed drive................................................................................................................
4.2.4 - Motor nameplate ................................................................................................................................................... 29
Speeds and ramps ................................................................................................................................................
4.2.6 - Customer interface ................................................................................................................................................
4.2.7 - Additional settings 1, if
Ctr.01 = Centrifugal application.............................................................................................................................
Additional settings 2, if Ctr.01 = Brake motor application .......................................................................................
Default drive control connections and functions .........................................................................................
4.4 - .......................................................
...............
4.6 - .................................................................................................. 42
4.7 - Brake control sequence .............................................................................................................................
5 - ADVANCED PARAMETER-SETTING MODE .................................................................................................... 46

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 46
Menu organisation ................................................................................................................................................. 46
Explanations of symbols used ............................................................................................................................... 47
Menu 1: Speed references and limitations .................................................................................................

Menu 1 diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................
Explanation of parameters in menu 1 ....................................................................................................................
Menu 2: Ramps..........................................................................................................................................
Menu 2 diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................... 61
Menu 4: Current loop - Torque control ........................................................................................................ 67

Menu 4 diagrams ................................................................................................................................................... 67
Explanation of parameters in menu 4 .................................................................................................................... 69
................................................................................................................................ 72
..................................................................................................................................................... 72
....................................................................................................................

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
CONTENTS
Menu 6: Programmable logic and counters ................................................................................................

Menu 6 diagrams ...................................................................................................................................................
Menu 7: Analog inputs/outputs ................................................................................................................... 90
Menu 7 diagrams ................................................................................................................................................... 90
Explanation of parameters in menu 7 .................................................................................................................... 91
..................................................................................................................................... 94
................................................................................................................................................... 94
.................................................................................................................... 96
Menu 9: Logic functions ........................................................................................................................... 99
Menu 9 diagrams ................................................................................................................................................. 99
Explanation of parameters in menu 9 ................................................................................................................ 101
Menu 10: Trip management drive states ................................................................................................ 107

Menu 10 diagrams ............................................................................................................................................. 107
Explanation of parameters in menu 10............................................................................................................... 109
................................................................................................ 114
Menu 11 diagram ................................................................................................................................................114
Explanation of parameters in menu 11................................................................................................................
Menu 12: Comparator and function blocks ............................................................................................. 119
Menu 12 diagrams ..............................................................................................................................................119
Explanation of parameters in menu 12 ..............................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................
Menu 14: PID controller .........................................................................................................................
Menu 14 diagram...............................................................................................................................................
Explanation of parameters in menu 14 ..............................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................
Menu 16: PLC functions .........................................................................................................................
Menu 16 diagrams .............................................................................................................................................
Explanation of parameters in menu 16 .............................................................................................................. 141
Menu 17: Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 146
...........................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................
Menu 19: Additional I/O options .............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................... 160
Menu 20 diagram............................................................................................................................................... 160
Explanation of parameters in menu 20 .............................................................................................................. 161
Menu 21: Second motor map ................................................................................................................. 164
6 - OPERATION WITH MODBUS RTU.................................................................................................................. 167
6.1 - Serial link ................................................................................................................................................. 167
6.1.1 - Location and connection ..................................................................................................................................... 167
6.1.2 - Protocols ............................................................................................................................................................. 167
Parameter setting ................................................................................................................................................ 167
6.1.4 - .......................................................................................................................................................... 167
6.2 - Parameter setting using the PC ............................................................................................................... 167
Control word and status word................................................................................................................... 167

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
CONTENTS
6.4 - MODBUS RTU ........................................................................................................................................ 167

6.4.1 - General ............................................................................................................................................................... 167
6.4.2 - Description of exchanges .................................................................................................................................... 167
Parameter mapping .............................................................................................................................................
6.4.4 - Data encoding .....................................................................................................................................................
Function codes ....................................................................................................................................................
6.4.6 - Example .............................................................................................................................................................. 170
6.4.7 - Wait time ............................................................................................................................................................. 170
Exceptions........................................................................................................................................................... 170
6.4.9 - CRC .................................................................................................................................................................... 170
7 - TRIPS - DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................................................... 171
7.1 - Warning ................................................................................................................................................... 171
7.2 - Drive status .............................................................................................................................................. 171
Alarms ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
7.4 - Tripping on a fault..................................................................................................................................... 172
8 - MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................................................... 177

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
1 - INTRODUCTION
• The drives use an algorithm which is adjusted • Before setting the drive parameters, all
by parameters. The performance levels obtained instructions relating to installation and
depend on the parameter setting. Inappropriate connection contained in the installation document or
settings may have serious consequences for the manual supplied with the drive must have been
personnel and machinery. strictly observed.
• The drive parameters must only be set by appro- • Users of the drive should take particular care to
priately qualified and experienced personnel. avoid starting it accidentally.
• Before powering up the drive, check that the pow-
er connections (mains supply and motor) are correct,
and that any moving parts are mechanically protected.
2 - PARAMETER-SETTING 2.2 - Interface architecture

INTERFACE From the welcome screen, press the touch-sensitive key B as
indicated below to access the main page of the parameter-
2.1 - Presentation
- Informations: Can be used to obtain Informations very
The interface consists of a touch screen which can be used to
access various menus. It is supplied with its own connection setting interface, and also provides access to the language
cable. selection.
- Reading mode: Is used to display the status of the drive
• Do not connect/disconnect the interface when when stopped or during operation, as well as its main
the drive is powered up. measurement points.
After a loading phase following powering-up of the drive, the - Setting:
parameter-setting interface displays the following screen: parameters, saving parameters, as well as to set the date
and time on the display.
C - Keypad control: Gives direct access to motor control via
the touch screen (Run/Stop, direction of rotation, speed
reference). These screen parameters can be set using the
Setting/ Keypad Control setup via the keypad menu. keypad
- Trip history: Gives a quick overview of the last 10 drive trips.
- : This button is accessible on all screens in factory-set

A
B At any time and regardless of the screen displayed, the

button can be used to return to previous pages, as far as
the interface main page.
Repère Fonction
A
Touch-sensitive button for access to the main
B
menu
"PWR" LED, indicates the state of the interface
C
power supply
Touch-sensitive buttons for language selection
D
(can take a few minutes to load)
After 10 minutes without activity on the display, it returns to

the «Reading mode» screen.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.1 - «Informations» page 2.2.2 - «Reading mode» page
By means of 12 screen pages, this Reading mode is used to
the display a number of parameters representing the drive status,
software versions and run time. when stopped or running.
It is also the welcome page when the parameter-setting
interface is switched on.
Previous page Next page
List of parameters displayed in Reading mode

Page Name Address
Drive status 10.98
Page 01
Motor speed 05.04
Current magnitude 04.01
Page 02
Output frequency 05.01
Active current 04.02
Output voltage 05.02
Output power 05.03
Page 04 05.05
DC bus voltage/Supply voltage
07.81
Analog input 1 07.01
Analog input 2 07.02
07.03
Page 06
AO1 output 07.68
08.01 to
08.05
Page 07
08.07 to
Relays 1 and 2/STO inputs
08.09
Reference selected indicator 01.49
Preset selected reference indicator 01.50
Speed reference selected 01.01
Page 09
Pre-ramp reference 01.03
Post-ramp reference 02.01
Page 10
Control board temperature 07.55
06.22
Run time
Page 11 06.23
PID reference in user units 14.62
Page 12 PID feedback in user units 14.63

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.3 - «Setting» page 2.2.3.1 - Quick setup
«Quick setup» contains the most commonly used
parameters.
parameter setting:
- «Quick setup»:
- «Advanced setting»: Provides read and/or write access to

all drive parameters (access to this page is code-protected).
- «Backup»: Used to copy the drive parameters to the
parameter-setting interface or vice versa (access to this page
is code-protected).
- «Keypad control setup»:
Stop and Speed reference commands necessary to control
the drive via the interface (access to this page is code-
protected).
- «HMI setup»: Used to set the interface date and time,
as well as to calibrate the touch screen and its brightness
(access to this page is code-protected).
Selected Quick
Menu Name
Parameter
Name
Parameter No.,
value and unit
Address
(Parameter Menu) in
“Advanced Parameter Setting”
Choice of Menu Choice of Parameter No.

(Ctr, Mtr, I/O, etc) (Ctr02, Ctr03, Ctr04, etc)
For a more detailed explanation of the menus and parameters

offered in «Quick setup», refer to section 4.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.3.2 - Advanced setting - Example of changing a multiple-choice parameter
«Advanced setting» provides read and write access to all (01.14)
drive parameters, grouped in menus. It is aimed mainly at
setting.
Cancel the entry if

you make a mistake
Menu Number
and Name
Parameter
Name
Menu No. Parameter,

value and unit
Choice of Menu (01 to 21) Choice of Parameter No.
- The value of the Read/Write parameters is displayed in a

white zone.
- The value of the Read-Only parameters is displayed on a
blue background (without active touch zone).
For a more detailed explanation of the menus and parameters

offered in «Advanced setting
Code 149 is the default code. To modify it, refer to parameter

11.61

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
- Example of changing a numerical parameter (01.06) 2.2.3.3 - Backup
«Backup
drive parameters.
Cancel the entry if

you make a mistake
Loading progress bars
Choice of direction of
data loading
Choice of file to be saved

(maximum 3 saves)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
- Example of Backup operation from drive to interface: - Example of Backup operation from interface to drive:
Select the file to

be transferred
to the drive
The settings are stored in

the interface...
... and correspond

to file no. 1 with
date and time
NOTE
Backup procedure.
Parameter set no. 1 has

been copied to the drive

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.3.4 - Keypad control setup To view the new touch-sensitive buttons that have been
«Keypad control setup» is used to enable or disable the enabled, you need to return to the main page, then select
Stop/Reset, Forward, Reverse and Speed reference touch- «keypad control».
sensitive buttons found on the «keypad control» screen, For more details on the «keypad control» screen, see section
accessible from the main page (see section 2.2.4). 2.2.4.
Keypad control is disabled by default, only the Stop/Reset
button is active.
must not be connected to the 24V.
CAUTION:
Selections made in the «Keypad control setup» page
have interactions with the Quick or advanced Setting
parameters:
Type in Setting the keypad reference to «Yes» forces Spd.03
code 149... (1.14) «Reference selector» to «Keypad».
Enabling Run/Stop commands via the keypad forces
06.43 (Ctr.05) to «LCD keypad». The Stop key on the
«keypad control» page is then active regardless of the
setting of 06.12.
...Then confirm Setting the «Keypad stop key» modifies the value of
06.12.
Setting the reference via the keypad modifies the value
Cancel the entry if of 01.17.
you make a mistake
Select the
commands
needed for
control via
the keypad...
...Then confirm

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.3.5 - HMI setup - Setting the date or time
«HMI setup» is used to set the date and time, check or
correct the touch screen calibration and its brightness.
50
Cancel the entry if you make a mistake

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Modifying the user trip labels • Setting the screen calibration
A stylus is used for this calibration in order to set the touch
screen parameters correctly.
50
1 2 use the keypad

to type the text, then 3
Once the trip has been activated, the text will be added to the
standard label, as indicated below.
The stylus should then be positioned at several points

suggested by crosses positioned on the screen. At the end of
calibration, click on the text at the top of the screen to return to
the «Date/Time» page.
• Setting the screen brightness
50
Click on the plus sign to increase the brightness or the minus

sign to reduce it.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.4 - Keypad control 2.2.5 - «Trip history» page
«Keypad control « is used to control the drive interface using «Trip history» displays the last 10 drive trips with the precise
the parameter-setting interface. date and time of the event.
By default, the screen gives Informations about the drive When the drive trips, it is displayed in a red banner, at the top
status, the calculated motor speed and the current magnitude. of the interface screen. When the drive trips an alarm, it is
The Stop/Reset command is also active. displayed in a orange banner.
Speed reference commands can be activated using the

«Keypad control»
When all the commands are active, the screen below appears.
To clear a trip: resolve the problem, then press the Stop/Reset

button.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
2.2.6 - «Stop/Reset» function 3 - PARAMETER-SETTING
SOFTWARE
With MDX-SOFT, setting parameters and supervising
the POWERDRIVE MD2 from a PC is very user-friendly.
and is used to give a stop command or reset the drive.

It can be disabled if necessary from «Keypad control setup» - File saving
or depending on the values of the 06.12 and 06.43 parameters
- Supervision (in table or progress bar form)

CAUTION: - Diagnostics
• The Stop/Reset key is automatically enabled for keypad - Representation of parameters in a table
control (regardless of the value of parameter 06.12
«Keypad stop key»). The MDX-SOFT software can be downloaded from the
• If the Stop/Reset touch-sensitive button is deactivated Internet at the following address:
(06.12 = Disabled), it does not appear on the interface http://acim.nidec.com/motors/leroy-somer/downloads/
pages, unless the drive trips. software-and-drawings
To connect the PC to the POWERDRIVE MD2CS, use an

2.3 - Communication loss alarm «MDX-USB Isolator» isolated USB kit. The other drive
If communication between the drive and the parameter- types have an isolated USB port as standard.
setting interface is broken, the following message appears on
the screen, preventing access to all the interface functions. • In conformity with standard EN 60950, the drive
To restore the serial link, check the connection between the USB link must provide an isolation of 4 kV
drive and the parameter-setting interface, then press the (MDX-USB isolator option is needed for POWERDRIVE
MD2CS).
key to return to the current page.
NOTE
If the control board is only supplied by the USB (drive
powered down), the optional board settings are not visible,
and are therefore neither saved nor restored.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4 - QUICK SETUP MODE

«Quick setup» contains the parameters most commonly used in standard applications.
the drive to the driven machine and the application.
Structure
«Quick setup»
- BASIC CONTROL OF THE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (Ctr)
- MOTOR NAMEPLATE (Mtr),
- SPEEDS AND RAMPS (Spd)
- CUSTOMER INTERFACE (I/O)
- ADDITIONAL SETTINGS (Apl)
Using the parameter-setting interface or MDX-SOFT software, select the BASIC CONTROL OF THE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
(Ctr) menu, and modify the suggested parameters in order, while keeping the default setting of any unused functions. Depending
on your selections, some menus are automatically adapted (transparent for the user).
MOTOR NAMEPLATE (Mtr) and SPEEDS AND RAMPS (Spd) menus.
If the application requires other functions, refer to the CUSTOMER INTERFACE (I/O) and ADDITIONAL SETTINGS (Apl) menus.
4.1 - List of parameters

• Ctr MENU: BASIC CONTROL OF THE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
Parameter Address Name Adjustment range Factory setting
Disabled
Centrifugal application
Ctr.01 11.43 Factory settings Disabled
Brake motor application
Other application
Induction motor: Voltage vector ctrl
Ctr.02 11.30 Motor technology selection
Ctr.03 05.18 Switching frequency
Ctr.04 04.07 Symmetric current limit
Terminals
Fieldbus
Ctr.05 06.43 Run/Stop source Terminals
LCD keypad
Run no latch
Run latched Controlled run
Ctr.06 06.04 Start stop logic select
Run Fwd/Rev (no latch)
Controlled run (no latch)
Ctr.07 01.10 Bipolar reference enable

Coast
Ramp
Ctr.08 06.01 Stop mode Ramp + DC Ramp
Zero speed DC
Timed DC
Disabled
Ctr.09 06.09 Catch a spinning motor Enabled Disabled
Forced motor stop before restart
Ctr.10 06.03 Mains loss mode Full stop

Delayed stop

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE

Controlled
Automatic
Ctr.11 10.80 Auto reset type Controlled
Clockwise
Ctr.12 05.59 Rotation direction Clockwise
C/clockwise
Rs measured each run
Rs not measured
Rs measured
Linear U/F law with boost
Ctr.13 05.14 Open loop mode select after each
Rs measured after each factory setting
power up
Rs measured after each power up
Square U/F law with boost
Stationary: motor data completed

Rotating: incomplete motor data
Ctr.14 05.12 Autotune Encoder offset measure/rotor parking
Encoder offset measure/signal injection
Stationary: incomplete motor data
Reserved
• Mtr MENU: MOTOR NAMEPLATE

Mtr.01 05.06 Motor rated frequency
Mtr.02 05.07 Motor rated current 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32 11.32
Mtr.03 05.08 Motor rated speed 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm

Mtr.04 05.09 Motor rated voltage 0 to 999 V 400 V
Mtr.05 05.10 Rated power factor 0.00 to 1.00
Disabled
Motor thermal protection Control board terminal
Mtr.06 05.70 Disabled
management MDX Encoder terminal
Control board & MDX encoder terminals
Mtr.07 05.50 Motor ventilation Self cooled Self cooled

Forced cooling
If Ctr.02 = PM: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSRPM) or PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM):
Mtr.08 05.24 d-axis inductance / leakage ind
Mtr.09 05.33 Motor volt per 1000 rpm (Ke)
If MDX-ENCODER option detected:
Incremental
Reserved
U, V, W only
Incremental UVW
Soft. 1 / Back EMF orientation Soft. 2 / Back

Mtr.10 03.38 Encoder type
Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation EMF orientation
Resolver
Resolver + signal loss detection
Mtr.11 03.34 Encoder lines per revolution 1024 lpr
Mtr.12 03.36 Encoder supply voltage
Mtr.13 03.25 Position feedback phase angle 0.0°

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE

If Ctr.02 = PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM):
Mtr.14 05.76 Design Base Current (DBC) ± 2.22 x 11.32 (A) 0.01 A
Mtr.15 05.72 q-axis inductance @ no load
Mtr.16 05.78 q-axis inductance @ DBC
Mtr.17 05.87 Phase offset @ DBC 0 to 90°
Mtr.18 05.86 Partial load phase Offset 0 to 90°
• Spd MENU: SPEEDS AND RAMPS

Spd.01 01.06 Maximum reference clamp 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm
Spd.02 01.07 Minimum reference clamp 0.00 to Spd.01 rpm 0.00 rpm
Terminal inputs
Analog input 1
Spd.03 01.14 Reference selector Analog input 2 Terminal inputs
Preset reference
Keypad
Spd.04 01.21 Preset ref. 1 + Spd.01 rpm 0.00 rpm
Spd.05 01.22 Preset ref. 2 + Spd.01 rpm 0.00 rpm
Spd.06 02.11 Acceleration rate 1 20.0 s
Spd.07 02.21 Deceleration rate 1 20.0 s
Fixed ramp
Automatic ramp
Spd.08 02.04 Deceleration ramp mode select Automatic ramp
Automatic ramp +
Fixed ramp +
If Ctr.02 = PM: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSRPM) or PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM):
Spd.09 03.10 Speed loop proportional gain Kp1
Spd.10 03.11 Speed loop integral gain Ki1 100
• I/O MENU: CUSTOMER INTERFACE

0-20 mA
20-0 mA
4-20 mA with detection 4-20 mA without
I/O.01 07.11 Analog input 2 mode
20-4 mA with detection detection
4-20 mA without detection
0-20 mA
20-0 mA
4-20 mA with detection
20-4 mA with detection
I/O.02 07.15 0-10 V
0-10 V
+/-10 V
+/-10 V
I/O.03 07.21 AO1 analog output 1 mode 0-20 mA 4-20 mA
4-20 mA
Motor speed
Current
I/O.04 07.19 AO1 analog output 1 source Current magnitude
magnitude
Output power
Active current
I/O.05 07.20 AO1 analog output 1 scale 0.000 to 60.000 1.000

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
I/O.06 08.21 DI1 input destination

Bit 0 Reference selection using digital inputs
Bit 0 Preset
Bit 0 Preset reference selection
reference
I/O.07 08.22 DI2 input destination using digital inputs
selection using
Run forward
digital inputs
Jog
Run reverse Bit 0 Reference
I/O.08 08.23 FWD/Reverse selection using
Run/Stop digital inputs
Stop
Drive reset
I/O.09 08.24 DI4 input destination Motorised potentiometer up Run forward
Motorised potentiometer down
Motorised potentiometer reset
I/O.10 08.25 Run reverse
I/O.11 08.26 DO1 digital output source Zero speed Zero speed
At speed
Motor overtemperature alarm

Vmax alarm
Brake release
I/O.12 08.28 Output relay 2 source Comparator 4 output Vmax alarm
• Apl MENU: ADDITIONAL SETTINGS 1, if Ctr.01 = Centrifugal application

Reset/Enable
Previous/Enable
Reset/Disable
Apl.01 09.21 Motorised potentiometer mode Reset/Disable
Previous/Disable
Min. Ref/Enable
Min. Ref/Disable
Apl.02 09.23 Motorised potentiometer rate 20 s
Apl.03 09.24 Motorised potentiometer scale factor 1.00
Preset ref. 1
Apl.04 09.25 Motorised potentiometer destination Preset ref. 2
Preset ref. 4
Apl.05 12.74 Comparator 4 threshold 0.00 to 60000.00 0.00
User trip 1
Apl.06 12.77 Comparator 4 output destination User trip 2
User trip 4
Apl.07 12.78 Comparator 4 masking
Apl.08 12.84 0.00 to 60000.00 200.00
User trip 1
Apl.09 12.87 User trip 2
User trip 4
Apl.10 12.88

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Analog input 1
Apl.11 14.03 PID reference source Analog input AI2
Buffer 1
Analog input 1
Apl.12 14.04 PID feedback source Analog input 2
Buffer 1
Disabled
Apl.13 14.08 PID enable Disabled
Enabled
Preset ref. 1
Apl.14 14.16 PID output destination Preset ref. 2
Preset ref. 4
Apl.15 14.10 PID proportional gain 1.000
Apl.16 14.11 PID integral gain
Apl.17 14.61 User unit factor ± 200.00 1.00
bar
mbar
Pa
PSI
Apl.18 14.60 User unit °C
°F
m /s
m /min
m /hr
l/min
Apl.19
and -
Apl.20
• Apl MENU: ADDITIONAL SETTINGS 2, if Ctr.01 = Brake motor application

Disabled
Apl.01 12.41 Brake controller Disabled
Enabled
Apl.02 12.42 Upper current threshold
Apl.03 12.44 Brake release speed 0.00 to 100.00 rpm
Apl.04 12.45 Brake apply speed 0.00 to 100.00 rpm
Apl.05 12.46 Brake delay
Apl.06 12.47 Post-brake release delay 1.00 s
Apl.07 03.05 Zero speed threshold
Apl.08 to
-
Apl.20

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.2 - Explanation of parameters 4.2.3 - Basic control of the variable speed drive
4.2.1 - Symbols and abbreviations Ctr.01 : Factory settings
Key: Disabled (#):
When the drive has completed the procedure for returning to
: Indicates a parameter used when the drive is factory settings, Ctr.01 returns to «Disabled».
Centrifugal application:
Return to factory settings of all parameters and adaptation
: Indicates a parameter used when the drive is of the «Quick setup» menu to a centrifugal application
(quadratic torque). The «Additional settings 1» Apl menu
speed feedback. becomes active (refer to section 4.2.7).
"Centrifugal application" is not restrictive and also
(#): Indicates the factory setting for the relevant parameter. covers the common applications such as pumps, fans,
compressors, mixers, extruders, crushers.
• Low saliency PM mode (e.g for LSRPM motor, from
Brake motor application:
Dyneo® range of Leroy-Somer):
Return to factory settings of all parameters and adaptation of
Dedicated for ISPM (surface mounted permanent magnet
the «Quick setup» menu to an application with brake motor.
motor) or IPM (Interior permanent magnet motor) where
The «Additional settings 2» Apl menu becomes active (refer
• PM Assisted Synchro Reluctance PMASR mode (e.g for

Other application:
+
range of Leroy-Somer):
Return to factory settings of all parameters without adaptation
Dedicated for hybrid motor technology with high saliency ratio
of the «Quick setup» menu. The «Additional settings 1 & 2»
where the torque is mainly produced by the reluctant effect.
Apl menus are inactive.
NOTE
4.2.2 - Accuracy and resolution
- Analog input resolution (AI1): 11 bits + sign. adapt the «Additional settings» Apl menu to his application.
- Analog input resolution (AI2): 12 bits + sign. In this case, refer to parameters 11.01 to 11.20 in the
- «Advanced setting
- Speed loop sampling time: 2 ms.
- PID (Menu 14) sampling time: 6 ms. Ctr.02 : Motor technology selection
- Preset speed reference resolution: 0.01 rpm.
- Static speed accuracy with encoder (1,024 pulses/rev): stopped. Each time the parameter Ctr.02 is edited,
some parameters related to the motor technology are
- automatically preset. Sets the motor technology and
settings. the type of control method (for detailed list of all preset
- Analog input and output sampling time period is 2 ms. parameters, see the advanced parameter 11.30).
None (#):
Induction motor: Voltage vector ctrl :

Dedicated for induction motors controlled in Voltage control
mode (see Ctr.13).
Induction motor: Oriented flux ctrl :
control mode with or without speed feedback (see Mtr.10).

NC
PM: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSRPM) :

Dedicated for PM motors with a low saliency ratio (< 2)
feedback (see Mtr.10).

NC
PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM) :

Dedicated for PMASR motors or IPM motors with high
with or without speed feedback (see Mtr.10).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Ctr.03 : Switching frequency In its factory setting:

- Terminal DI4 preset to FWD.
to shielding
Note: clamps (control)
FWD 7 DI4
CAUTION: Stop 8 DI5
A high switching frequency reduces the magnetic noise,
on the other hand it increases the drive losses. Refer to 9 +24V ref
the installation manual to determine the drive derating
according to the frequency. To change from FWD to REV or vice versa, go via a Stop
command.
Ctr.04 : Symmetric current limit
Used to set the maximum permanent current limit permitted. Run Fwd/Rev:
Command for Run/Stop via non latching contact.
NOTE
In «Quick setup», Ctr.04 of rotation.
- I/O.09 = Run/Stop (DI4 assignment).

Ctr.05 : Run/Stop source - I/O.10 = FWD/Reverse
Terminals (#): to shielding
Commands come from the control terminal block. clamps (control)
Fieldbus: Run/Stop 7 DI4

Change of 8 DI5
direction
Not active: 9 +24V ref
LCD keypad: Controlled run (no latch) (#):

Commands come from the MDX-Powerscreen or MDX- Command for FWD/Stop and REV/Stop via non latching
KEYPAD parameter-setting interface, connected to the drive. contacts.
In its factory setting:
NOTE
- Terminal DI4 preset to FWD/Stop.
Open STO1 and STO2 terminals before modifying Ctr.05.
Ctr.06 : Start stop logic select

FWD/Stop 7 DI4
In Terminals mode (see Ctr.05), used to choose one of 4 Run/
Stop command and rotation direction management modes. REV/Stop 8 DI5
NOTE 9 +24V ref
Open STO1 and STO2 terminals before modifying Ctr.06. to shielding
clamps (control)
Run no latch:
Command for FWD/Stop and REV/Stop via non latching
contacts. In its factory setting: On power-up or after a trip reset, if a run command is already
- Terminal DI4 preset to FWD/Stop.
must be cycled for the command to take effect.
Ctr.07 : Bipolar reference enable

FWD/Stop 7 DI4
REV/Stop 8 DI5 No (#):
All negative references are treated as invalid.
9 +24V ref
to shielding
Yes:
clamps (control) Used for changing the direction of rotation by the polarity of
the reference (which may come from the preset references).
On power-up or after a trip reset, if a Run command is already CAUTION

selected, the motor starts as soon as the speed reference If a LSHRM motor has no speed feedback sensor and if
appears. the application needs both directions of rotation, Ctr.07
Run latched: must be set to Yes.
Command for Run and Stop via latching contacts.
- I/O.10 = Stop
- I/O.07 = Run reverse (DI2 assignment if necessary).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Ctr.08 : Stop mode Zero speed DC ( ):

Stop by braking using low frequency current injection, then
Coast: DC injection at zero speed.
The drive stops in freewheel mode. The drive decelerates the motor by imposing a low frequency
The power bridge is deactivated as soon as the stop command current until it reaches almost zero speed, which the drive
is given. detects automatically.
The drive cannot receive another run command for 2 seconds,
the time required for motor demagnetisation. command can be taken into account until the drive is «ready».
After this stopping time, the drive is «ready». The machine Motor
stopping time depends on its inertia. speed
Motor
speed
t
Stop
t
Stop Time
Freewheel stop time Braked stop
Time
Motor
current
Ramp (#): 1 second
Stop on deceleration ramp.

The drive decelerates the motor according to the deceleration
mode chosen in parameter Spd.08.
One second after the stop, the drive is «ready».
Motor Motor Low frequency DC
speed current current injection injection
Timed DC ( ):
Stop on DC injection.
The drive decelerates the motor by imposing a current for
t
Stop the drive is «ready».
Deceleration Time
1 sec Motor
rate
speed
Ramp + DC ( ):
Stop on deceleration ramp with DC injection.
The drive decelerates the motor according to the deceleration
mode chosen in parameter Spd.08.
When zero frequency is reached, the drive injects DC current
for 1 second.The drive is «ready».
t
Motor Stop
speed Time
Braked stop
Motor
current
t DC
Stop injection
Motor
Deceleration Time (1 sec.)
current
rate
Motor
current
NOTE
In closed loop mode ( ), the «Ramp + DC», «Zero speed
DC
DC» and «Timed DC» stop modes are equivalent to the
injection «Ramp» stop mode.
(1 sec.)
Motor current

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Ctr.09 : Catch a spinning motor Delayed stop:

If there is a mains supply break, the drive will decelerate on a
ramp, which is automatically calculated by the drive, so that
• If the load is stationary at the time of the run the motor feeds back the energy to the DC bus.
command or when the mains supply returns, this On return to normal conditions:
operation may cause the machine to rotate in both
directions before the motor accelerates. Before reaccelerates up to its reference speed.
enabling this function, check that there is no danger to
equipment and personnel. deceleration continues in freewheel mode. The drive trips on
«Mains loss».
Disabled (#): DC bus DC bus
voltage Mains supply break voltage Mains supply break
The drive does not execute a "Catch a spinning motor" of a
coasting motor.
Enabled:
If the drive output is inactive, the drive executes a procedure
to calculate the motor frequency and direction of rotation.
Motor Motor
After the output bridge is reactivated, it will automatically speed speed
recalibrate the output frequency to the measured value and
reaccelerate the motor up to the reference frequency.
Forced Motor stop before restart:
This mode can be used to stop a coasting motor before
starting it again. Mains loss Mains
time (0.5 s) loss time
- Induction motor: A DC current is injected in the motor. (0.5 s)
The level and the duration of the DC current injection are
Ctr.11 : Auto reset type
seconde.
Controlled (#) :
- Synchronous motor: To decelerate the motor, the drive Trip reset by a Reset command on the terminals or via the
adds losses in the stator by controlling the motor current parameter-setting interface.
amplitude. The level and the duration of the motor current
Automatic:
1 seconde. All trips automatically reset.
Auto for 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084:
NOTE Reserved for «Advanced setting» mode (menu 10).
Catch a coasting motor is not compatible with the S ramp
associated with brake control (Apl.01 Auto except 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084:
Reserved for «Advanced setting» mode (menu 10).
Ctr.10 : Mains loss mode
Ctr.12 : Rotation direction
No detection (#): This parameter is used to modify the direction of rotation when
The drive does not take account of mains supply breaks and viewed from the drive end, without changing the speed reference
sign.
bus. It is only taken into account when the drive is stopped.
Mains loss
DC bus
voltage Drive output
bridge interlock
Ctr.13 : Open loop mode select ( )
Determines the voltage control mode. The «Rs measured
Bus undervoltage each run», «Rs not measured», «Rs measured after each
threshold
factory setting» and «Rs measured after each power up»
These 4 modes are distinguished by the method used

CAUTION: to identify the motor parameters, in particular the stator
The "Full stop" and "Delayed stop" cases can only work resistance. As these parameters vary with temperature
correctly if the energy stored in the application is more and are essential for obtaining optimum performance, the
than the energy to be provided during the mains loss. machine cycle must be taken into account when selecting the
Eligible applications: ventilation, centrifuging, etc. most appropriate mode.
The «Linear U/F law with boost» and «Square U/F law with
Full stop: boost» modes correspond to control by U/F ratio modes for
If there is a mains supply break, the drive will decelerate on a induction motors.
ramp, which is automatically calculated by the drive, so that
the motor feeds back the energy to the DC bus. On return Rs measured each run:
to normal conditions, deceleration continues until the motor The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured each
stops, according to the stop mode programmed in Ctr.08. time the drive receives a run command.
The drive trips on «Mains loss». These measurements are only valid if the machine is stopped,
run command is given less than 2 seconds after the previous

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Ctr.14 : Autotune
2 seconds required between a stop command and a new run
command.
• During the autotune phase, brake control is
Rs not measured: disabled.
The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. • If Ctr.14 is set to "Rotating: incomplete motor data",
This mode is less effective than the «Rs measured each run» "Encoder offset measure / rotor parking" or "Encoder
mode but it is compatible with all operating cycles. During offset measure / signal injection", the motor rotates at
commissioning, an autotune when stopped should be carried low speed or at 2/3 of its rated speed. Make sure that
out (Ctr.14 this operation does not present any safety risks, and
and voltage offset values. that the motor is stopped before initiating the autotune
Linear U/F law with boost: procedure.
• After modifying the motor parameters, repeat
autotuning.
NOTE
Use this mode to control several motors connected in parallel.
• If Ctr.02 = "Induction motor: Voltage vector ctrl"
Motor voltage
Mtr.04
None (#):
Mtr.04/2 Stationary: motor data completed:

The stator resistance and the voltage offset are measured
and stored.
Boost
Motor Rotating: incomplete motor data:
Mtr.01/2 Mtr.01 frequency
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking:

Rs measured after each factory setting:
After a return to factory settings, the stator resistance and
Encoder offset measure/signal injection:
(drive output active).
Rs measured after each power up (#): Stationary: incomplete motor data:
The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured the
Reserved:
up.
• A voltage is briefly applied to the motor. For

safety reasons, live parts must NOT be • If Ctr.02
accessible once the drive is powered up.
None (#):
Square U/F law with boost:
Stationary: motor data completed:
Motor voltage and stored.
Mtr.04
Rotating: incomplete motor data:
and stored. The d-axis inductance / leakage ind Mtr.08 and
total inductance «Ls» are also measured and stored. The
power factor Mtr.05 is automatically updated.
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking :
Boost This mode is only active if Mtr.10 is set «Resolver». In this
Mtr.01 Motor frequency mode, the motor runs at very low speed so that the resolver
offset can be measured. This offset is automatically stored in
Mtr.13.
Encoder offset measure/signal injection:
Stationary: incomplete motor data:
Reserved:

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
• If Ctr.02 Procedures to carry out the autotune:

None (#): • Stationary: motor data completed:
- Ensure that the known motor parameters have been
- Enable the drive.
- If the drive is undersized in relation to the motor power,
and stored. The stator inductance is measured but not stored.
reduce the current limit Ctr.04 in order to avoid causing the
An alarm is generated if its value is very different from the
drive to trip.
value entered in Mtr.08. The current loop is automatically set.
- Give a run command. The motor is driven, then performs a
Rotating: incomplete motor data: freewheel stop when autotuning is complete.
The stator resistance and the voltage offset are measured - Wait until the procedure ends. Ctr.14
and stored. The d-axis inductance / Leakage ind Mtr.08 - Disable the drive and remove the run command.
and Motor volt per 1000 rpm (Ke) Mtr.09 are measured and The motor is then ready to operate normally.
stored.
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking: • Rotating: incomplete motor data:
This mode is only active if Mtr.10 is set to «U, V, W only», - Ensure that the known motor parameters have been
In this mode, the motor runs at very low speed so that the - If the drive is undersized in relation to the motor power,
encoder offset can be measured. This offset is automatically reduce the current limit Ctr.04 in order to avoid causing the
stored in Mtr.13. drive to trip.
Encoder offset measure/signal injection: - Enable the drive.
freewheel stop when autotuning is complete.
Stationary: incomplete motor data: - Wait until the procedure ends. Ctr.14
Reserved. - Disable the drive and remove the run command.
Reserved: The motor is then ready to operate normally.
• In this mode, the motor runs at 2/3 of its rated

speed or at 1000 rpm maximum.
• If Ctr.02
• Encoder offset measure/rotor parking:
None (#): -
and that the motor is stopped.
- Enable the drive.
- Give a run command. The motor runs at very low speed
until the encoder offset can be measured.
and stored. The stator inductance is measured but not stored.
The current loop is automatically set.
• Encoder offset measure/signal injection:
Rotating: incomplete motor data:
-
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking: - Enable the drive.
- Give a run command. The motor shaft moves slightly during
Encoder offset measure/signal injection: the measuring phase.
This mode is only active if Mtr.10 is set to «U, V, W only», NOTE
- If a stop command is given before the end of the autotune
current signal with high frequency and low amplitude phase, an autotune trip is generated.
is injected into the motor stator. The encoder offset is - An auto-tune test cannot be initiated if the drive is tripped or
determined by measuring the motor stator inductance in the drive inverter is active.
multiple directions. - After modifying motor parameters, repeat autotuning.
This offset is automatically stored in Mtr.13. - If Ctr.14 = "Encoder offset measure/rotor parking" or
Stationary: incomplete motor data: "Encoder offset measure/signal injection": the autotune is
Reserved.
Reserved:

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.2.4 - Motor nameplate Self cooled (#):

The motor has a fan on the shaft.
Mtr.01 : Motor rated frequency
This is the point at which motor operation changes from Forced cooling:
constant torque to constant power. The motor has a forced ventilation unit.
In standard operation, it is the frequency indicated on the NOTE
motor nameplate. This parameter combined with other motor parameters is
used to estimate the machine thermal use percentage.
Mtr.02 : Motor rated current
This is the value of the motor rated current indicated on the Mtr.08 : d-axis inductance / leakage ind
nameplate. The main purpose of the motor rated current is to - Induction motor: Value of the overall leakage inductance
applied to the typical machine stator. The value of Mtr.08
CAUTION: is stored automatically during an autotune when running in
Do not set a different value than the one plated on the Ctr.14).
motor.
- Synchronous motor: Value of the cyclical stator inductance.
The value of Mtr.08 is used for PM or PMASR motors. Its
Mtr.03 : Motor rated speed
value should be entered preferably from the nameplate
This is the on-load speed of the motor indicated on the
data, or else using the autotune procedure (see Ctr.14).
nameplate.
NOTE Mtr.09 : Motor volt per 1000 rpm (Ke)
This value must take into account the slip of the induction The value of Mtr.09 is used for synchronous motors.
motor with respect to the synchronous speed. Under no Its value should be entered preferably from the nameplate
circumstances must this slip be negative. data or else using the rotating autotune procedure.
NOTE
Mtr.04 : Motor rated voltage Mtr.09
Enter the rated voltage indicated on the nameplate taking represents the Motor volt per 10000 rpm.
account of the normal power supply conditions.
Mtr.10 : Encoder type
The drive must be equipped:
Mtr.05 : Rated power factor -
The Cos φ is measured automatically during an autotune when
running phase (see Ctr.14) and stored in this parameter. If it - With an MDX-RESOLVER option for managing resolvers.
has not been possible to carry out this autotune procedure, CAUTION:
enter the Cos φ value indicated on the motor nameplate. Mtr.10 is not active when Ctr.02 = Induction motor:
Voltage vector ctrl.
Mtr.06 : Motor thermal protection management
NOTE
Disabled (#): Mtr.10 can be preset by Ctr.02 depending of motor
PTC temperature sensors not managed by the drive. technology selection.
Control board terminal:
Fault management of a motor temperature sensor connected • If Ctr.02
to DI1/CTP input of the main control board.
Incremental:
MDX Encoder terminal: Speed feedback via quadrature incremental encoder with
Fault management of a motor temperature sensor connected A,A\,B,B\ signals. Related parameter: Mtr.11.
Reserved:
Control board & MDX encoder terminals:
Fault management of 2 motor temperature sensors
respectively connected to DI1/CTP input of the main control U,V,W only:
option. Incremental U,V,W:

CAUTION: Same as «Incremental».The U, V, W signals are not used.
If Mtr.06 is set to «Control board terminal» or «Control
Hall effect sensor:
board & MDX encoder terminals», then digital input DI1
must not be used (do not assign I/O.06).
NOTE Soft. 1 / Back EMF orientation:
Mtr.06 can be preset by Ctr.02 depending of motor "Sensorless" mode recommended for applications where low
technology selection. starting torque is required (pump, fan, etc).
Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (#):
Mtr.07 : Motor ventilation This "Sensorless" mode is automatically preselected after
Not cooled:
The motor has neither an internal fan nor a forced ventilation Ctr.02. It is recommended for applications where high starting
unit. torque is required (grinder, press, extruding machine, etc).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Soft. 3 to 5: Resolver + signal loss detection:

Resolver with monitoring of the signals feedback level.
Resolver:
Speed feedback via resolver with no monitoring of the signals Mtr.11 : Encoder lines per revolution
level.
encoder revolution. Converts the encoder input into a speed.
Resolver + signal loss detection:
Resolver with monitoring of the signals feedback level. Mtr.12 : Encoder supply voltage
5V (#):
• If Ctr.02
15V:
Incremental:
CAUTION:
Before selecting «15V», check that the encoder used can
Reserved: withstand this voltage.
Mtr.13 : Position feedback phase angle

U,V,W only:
This selection allows use in downgraded operation of an Indicates the result of the phasing test performed during
encoder with commutation signals whose A and B channels autotuning (see Ctr.14). It is stored when the drive is powered
are not operational.
autotune.
Incremental U,V,W:
• The phase angle, when it is known, can be
incremental encoder with A,A\,B,B\ signals and U,U\ V,V\ entered manually. Any incorrect value can
W,W\ commutation channels. cause the motor to rotate in the wrong direction or trip
the drive.
Hall effect sensor:
effect sensors phase-shifted by 120° electrical. Mtr.14 : Design Base Current (DBC)
Soft. 1 / Back EMF orientation:
value Mtr.16 and Phase Offset Mtr.17 are characterized.
NOTE
Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (# if Ctr.02 = PM: Oriented
This parameter is suitable when Ctr.02 = PMASR: Oriented
flux ctrl. (LSRPM)):
This sensorless mode is automatically preselected after
Ctr.02. Mtr.15 : q-axis inductance @ no load
It is not suitable for Ctr.02
Mtr.14.
NOTE
Fill in parameters Mtr.01 to Mtr.04, Mtr.08 and Mtr.09 using NOTE
the motor nameplate data. Then perform an autotune Ctr.14 This parameter is suitable when Ctr.02 = PMASR: Oriented
= "Stationary: motor data completed".
Soft. 3 / Adaptive model (# if Ctr.02 = PMASR: Oriented Mtr.16 : q-axis inductance @ DBC
flux Ctrl. (LSHRM)):
This sensorless mode is automatically preselected after the motor current is equal to the Design Base Current Mtr.14
and the phase offset equals to Mtr.17.
Ctr.02. It is not suitable for Ctr.02
(LSRPM)". NOTE
NOTE
Fill in parameters Mtr.01 to Mtr.04, Mtr.08 , Mtr.09, Mtr.14,
Mtr.15, Mtr.16, Mtr.17 and Mtr.18 using motor data available, Mtr.17 : Phase offset @ DBC
then perform an autotune Ctr.14 = «Stationary: motor data
completed».
of the motor current and the direction of the no-load motor
Soft. 4 / Stator flux orientation: voltage which produces the maximum torque when the motor
This mode is recommended for applications where the ratio current is equal to the design base current (DBC) Mtr.14.
NOTE
and Ctr.02 This parameter is suitable when Ctr.02 = PMASR: Oriented
Soft. 5:
Resolver:
Speed feedback via resolver with no monitoring of the signals
level.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Mtr.18 : Partial load phase offset Spd.06 : Acceleration rate 1

Sets the time for acceleration from 0 to 1000 rpm.
of the motor current and the direction of the no-load motor Spd.06 = t(s) x 1000 rpm
voltage which produces the maximum torque when the motor (N2 - N1) rpm
current is equal to half design base current (DBC) (Mtr.14/2) .
This value is indicated on the motor nameplate. N (min-1)
NOTE 1000
N2
4.2.5 - Speeds and ramps

N1
Spd.01 : Maximum reference clamp
Maximum speed in both directions of rotation. 0 t
t (s)
Value of Spd.06
• Before setting the maximum limit, check that
the motor and the driven machine can Spd.07 : Deceleration rate 1
withstand it. Sets the time for deceleration from 1000 rpm to 0.
Spd.02 : Minimum reference clamp t(s) x 1000 rpm

Spd.07 =
(N2 - N1) rpm
bipolar mode). N (rpm)
1000
CAUTION:
• This parameter is inactive during jog operation. N2
• If the value of Spd.01 is lower than that of Spd.02, the
value of Spd.02 is automatically changed to the new
value of Spd.01.
N1
Spd.03 : Reference selector

0 t (s)
t
Terminal inputs (#):
Value of Spd.07
Selection of the speed reference on differential analog input 1
Analog input 1:
Spd.08 : Deceleration ramp mode select
The speed reference comes from differential analog input 1
(AI1+ and AI1- terminals).
Analog input 2: Fixed ramp:
The speed reference comes from differential analog input 2 Deceleration ramp imposed. If the deceleration ramp which
(AI2+ and AI2- terminals). has been set is too fast in relation to the inertia of the load,
the DC bus voltage exceeds its maximum value («T» rating:
Preset reference:
Selection of the speed reference comes from preset reference overvoltage».
PR1 if digital input DI2 is open or PR2 if DI2 is closed (set
Spd.04 for PR1 or Spd.05 for PR2). CAUTION:
Keypad: Select «Fixed ramp» mode when a braking resistor is
The speed reference comes from the parameter-setting being used.
interface (see section 2.2.4). Automatic ramp (#):
Standard deceleration ramp with automatic extension of
Spd.04 : Preset ref. 1 the ramp time in order to avoid causing a drive DC bus
Automatic ramp +:
Spd.05 : Preset ref. 2
The drive allows the motor voltage to be increased to up to 1.2
times the rated voltage set in Mtr.04 (motor rated voltage), to
avoid reaching the maximum DC bus voltage threshold («T»
avoid causing a drive DC bus overvoltage trip.

For the same amount of energy, this mode enables faster
deceleration than «Automatic ramp» mode.
t(s) x 1000 rpm
(N2 - N1) rpm

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Fixed ramp +: 4-20 mA without detection:

Same as «Automatic ramp +» mode, but the ramp is imposed. 4 to 20 mA current input without detection.
20-4 mA without detection:
overvoltage.
20 to 4 mA current input without detection.
CAUTION: 0-10V (#):
In «Automatic ramp +» and «Fixed ramp +» modes, the 0 to 10 V voltage input.
motor must be capable of withstanding the additional
losses relating to the increase in voltage at its terminals. ± 10V:
± 10 V voltage input.
Spd.09 : Speed loop proportional gain Kp1 ( )
Used to set the amount by which the speed reference is I/O.03 : AO1 analog output 1 mode
exceeded following an acceleration or following a load
impact. The setting of Spd.09 depends on the load inertia. ± 10 V:
The factory value is suitable for low inertia. For applications ± 10 V voltage output.
with high applied inertia (fan, centrifuge, grinders, etc), the
value of Spd.09 needs to be increased. 0-20 mA:
Increase the proportional gain until vibration occurs in the 0 to 20 mA current output.
4-20 mA (#):
motor remains fairly stable in the event of sudden variations in
4 to 20 mA current output.
speed, both at no load and on load.
I/O.04 : AO1 analog output 1 source

Spd.10 : Speed loop integral gain Ki1 ( )
This parameter is used to select the source you wish to assign
Sets the stability of the motor speed on load impact.
to analog output AO1.
Increase the integral gain to limit the speed recovery time in
The source can be assigned to the actual motor speed, the
the event of load impact.
current magnitude, the motor power or the motor active current.
4.2.6 - Customer interface I/O.05 : AO1 analog output 1 scale
I/O.01 : Analog input 2 mode This parameter is used to scale the AO1 analog output.
NOTE
analog input AI2. When I/O.05 = 1.000, the maximum value of the analog
If a mode with detection is selected, the drive will cause an output corresponds to the maximum value of the parameter
«AI2 current loop loss» trip on detection of signal break. which is assigned to it.
0-20 mA:
0 to 20 mA current input. I/O.06 : DI1 input destination
I/O.07 : DI2 input destination
20-0 mA:
20 to 0 mA current input. I/O.08 : DI3 input destination
4-20 mA with detection: I/O.09 : DI4 input destination
4 to 20 mA current input with detection. I/O.10 : DI5 input destination
20-4 mA with detection: These parameters are used to select the destination for digital
20 to 4 mA current input with detection.
The destination can be assigned to reference selection
4- 20 mA without detection (#): by digital input combination (bit 0), selection of the preset
4 to 20 mA current input without detection. reference (bit 0), run forward, jog, run reverse, change of
20-4 mA without detection: direction of rotation (forward/reverse), run/stop, stop, trip
20 to 4 mA current input without detection. reset, motorised potentiometer up, motorised potentiometer
down and motorised potentiometer reset.
I/O.02 : AI3 signal Mode CAUTION:
If Mtr.06 is set to «Control board terminal» or «Control
board & MDX encoder terminals», then digital input DI1
If a mode with detection is selected, the drive will cause an must not be used (do not assign I/O.06).
0-20 mA: I/O.11 : DO1 digital output source

0 to 20 mA current input. I/O.12 : Output relay 2 source
20-0 mA: These parameters are used to select the source you wish to
20 to 0 mA current input. assign to digital output DO1 or output relay RL2.
The source can be assigned to zero speed, at speed,
4-20 mA with detection: nominal load reached, the motor overtemperature alarm,
4 to 20 mA current input with detection. the maximum speed alarm, state of the brake control output,
20-4 mA with detection:
20 to 4 mA current input with detection.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.2.7 - Additional settings 1, if Apl.06 : Comparator 4 output destination

Ctr.01 = Centrifugal application
assigned by the comparator output.
Apl.01 : Motorised potentiometer mode
The destination can be assigned to user trip 1 to 4.
Reset/Enable:
The reference is reset to 0 on each power-up. The up/down Apl.07 : Comparator 4 masking
and reset inputs are active at all times. This masking is used to delay detection when the drive is
enabled in order to avoid detection on starting.
Previous/Enable:
On power-up, the reference is at the same level as before power-
down. The up/down and reset inputs are active at all times. Apl.08 : Comparator 5 threshold
Reset/Disable (#): speed.

The reference is reset to 0 on each power-up. The up/down Apl.05 is used to set the comparator trip threshold and
inputs are active only when the drive output is active. The consequently detects an underload.
reset input is active at all times. The threshold is expressed in rpm by default.
Previous/Disable:
On power-up, the reference is at the same level as before Apl.09 : Comparator 5 output destination
power-down. The up/down inputs are only active when the
drive output is active. The reset input is active at all times. assigned by the comparator output.
The destination can be assigned to user trip 1 to 4.
Min. Ref/Enable:
On power-up, the reference value equals the minimum speed Apl.10 : Comparator 5 masking
(Spd.02). The up/down and reset inputs are active at all times. This masking is used to delay detection when the drive is
Min. Ref/Disable: enabled in order to avoid detection on starting.
On power-up, the reference value equals the minimum speed
(Spd.02). The up/down inputs are only active when the drive Apl.11 : PID reference source
output is active. The reset input is active at all times.
for the PID controller.
All PID variables are automatically scaled so that these
Apl.02 : Motorised potentiometer rate
to buffer variable 1 (for buffer variable details, please refer to
Apl.03 : Motorised potentiometer scale factor

The maximum value of the motorised potentiometer Apl.12 : PID feedback source
reference automatically takes the maximum value of the
parameter to which it is assigned. feedback for the PID controller.
This parameter can therefore be used to adapt the maximum All the PID variables are automatically scaled so that these
value of the motorised potentiometer reference to the
maximum value required by the application.
Example:
- The up/down reference is addressed to a preset reference to buffer variable 1 (for buffer variable details, please refer to
with the adjustment range + Spd.01.
- If Spd.01
down reference corresponds to 1000 rpm: Apl.13 : PID enable
Disabled (#):
1000 The PID controller is disabled.
==> Apl.03 = = 0.67
Spd.01
Enabled:
Apl.04 : Motorised potentiometer destination The PID controller is enabled.
which the motorised potentiometer reference will control. Apl.14 : PID output destination
Example: The motorised potentiometer reference acts as a
speed reference. The motorised potentiometer reference can addressed.
be sent to a preset reference (select for example PR1: Preset In this case, as the PID output is supposed to affect the speed,
Reference Spd.04). select for example PR1: Preset reference or PR2: Preset
reference.
Apl.05 : Comparator 4 threshold
By default, the comparator 4 source is assigned to the motor Apl.15 : PID proportional gain
power.
Apl.05 is used to set the comparator trip threshold and Apl.15
consequently detects an underload.
The threshold is expressed in kW by default.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Apl.16 : PID integral gain : This time delay is used to delay the brake apply command
Apl.16 = 1.000 the in relation to passage below the minimum speed threshold
(Apl.04). It is useful for avoiding repeated oscillation of the
brake when it is being applied around zero speed.
Apl.17 : User unit factor
Apl.06 : Post-brake release delay
This time delay is triggered when brake control is enabled. It
reference and PID feedback to be displayed as a user value
is used to allow time for the brake to release before unlocking
in the parameter-setting interface Reading mode pages (see
the speed ramp.
section 2.2.2).
Apl.07 : Zero speed threshold
Apl.18 : User unit
This parameter describes the unit which will be displayed for parameter, the «Zero speed» alarm will be enabled. In
the PID reference and the PID feedback in the parameter-
setting interface Reading mode pages (see section 2.2.2). output DO1 using parameter I/O.11.
In Voltage control mode, upon a stop command, the drive
Apl.19 and Apl.20 : Not used decelerates on the selected ramp to the threshold set by
Apl.07, and then the motor goes into freewheel mode.
4.2.8 - Additional settings 2, if Ctr.01 = Brake
motor application Apl.08 to Apl.20 : Not used
Apl.01 : Brake controller
Disabled (#):
Brake control is disabled.
Enabled:
Brake control is enabled.
Apl.02 : Upper current threshold ( )

Used to set the current threshold at which the brake will be
at the time the brake is released.
Apl.03 : Brake release speed

Used to set the speed threshold at which the brake will be
provided to drive the load in the right direction when the brake
is released. In general, this threshold is set at a value slightly
above the motor slip expressed in rpm.
Example:
- Rated on-load speed = 1470 rpm
Apl.04 : Brake apply speed

Used to set the speed threshold at which brake control will
be disabled. This threshold enables the brake to be applied
before zero speed so as to avoid load veering while the brake
is being engaged. If the frequency or speed drops below this
threshold when no stop request has been made (change of
direction of rotation), brake control will remain activated. This
exception can be used to avoid the brake being applied as the
motor passes through zero speed.
Apl.05 : Brake delay

: This time delay is triggered when all the conditions
for brake release have been met. It allows enough time to
establish an adequate level of reactive current in the motor and
to ensure that the slip compensation function is fully activated.
When this time delay has elapsed, brake control is enabled.
During the whole pre-brake delay period, the ramp applied to
the reference is held constant.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.3 - Default drive control connections and functions

- Most common applications include pumps, fans, compressors, mixers, crushers, extruders, …
-
brake.
-
adaptation.
- The STO-1 and STO-2 inputs must be closed before giving a run command.
PX1
1 +10V ref • Modification of the Run/Stop control logic
0-10 V speed 2 AI1+
reference
3 AI1-
Run FWD 7 DI4
4-20 mA speed 4 AI2+
reference Stop 8 DI5
5 AI2-
9 +24V ref
6 0V
7 AI3 List of parameters to adjust :
4-20 mA 8 AO1 Ctr.06 (06.04) = Run Latched (1),
current image
I/O.10 (08.25) = Stop 06.39
Motor PTC* 9 DI1/PTC
10 0V - For Run/Stop control with change of direction :
PX2 Run/Stop 7 DI4

1 +24V ref Change of direction 8 DI5
Zero speed 2 DO1 9 +24V ref
Safe Torque Off/ 3 STO-1
Drive enable input 1
Reference selection 4 DI2 List of parameters to adjust :
Reference selection 5 DI3 Ctr.06 (06.04) = Run Fwd/Rev (2),
Safe Torque Off/ I/O.09 (08.24) = Run/Stop 06.34 (DI4 terminal),
6 STO-2
Drive enable input 2 I/O.10 (08.25) = Fwd/Reverse 06.33
Run FWD/Stop 7 DI4
Run REV/Stop 8 DI5 For MDX-ENCODER or MDX-RESOLVER connection,
9 +24V ref
please refer to the Installation guide ref.5340.
• Selection of the reference via digital inputs:

PX3 DI2 DI3
Selection
Drive status 1 COM-RL1 (01.45) (01.41)
relay (N/O)** 2 RL1 Voltage speed reference (0-10 V) on
0 0
3 COM-RL2 analog input AI1+, AI1-
Maximum speed
alarm relay (N/O) Current speed reference (4-20 mA) on
4 RL2
0 1
analog input AI2+, AI2-
1 0 Preset reference 2
(*) If the motor thermal sensor needs to be connected to DI1/
1 1 Spd.05 (01.22) to be set
CTP, set Mtr.06 (05.70) = Control board terminal (1).
(**) If the 2 STO inputs are not closed at the same time, the
relay RL1 opens.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.4 - Quick start procedure in Voltage vector or Oriented flux control mode
This quick start is suitable to control an induction motor (e.g LSES) in voltage vector control or a permanent magnet motor (e.g
-
- Mtr.10 =
- Minimum application rated speed = 1/10e of rated speed.
Drive auto test sequence
Drive off, check that:

• STO-1 and STO-2 terminals are connected to +24V terminal
• Run command is connected but not enabled
• U,V,W motor terminals are respectively connected to U, V and W terminals of the drive. Motor will run clockwise looking at
DE when run forward is enabled. If not appropriate use parameter Ctr.12 to reverse direction rather than crossing cables
Switch the drive power supply ON:

• The test is automatically performed during power up (5 sec sequence)
• At the end of the test:
 If the test passed, the HMI displays "Ready" and the drive is ready to use
 if a "Diagnostic" trip appears, read the result of the power module test in 17.06
Set the HMI clock according to procedure detailed in section 2.2.3.5

Open STO-1 and STO-2 to disable the drive during drive setting
Application selection
In "Setting" mode, select "Quick Setup" mode

Set Ctr.01 (11.43) = "Centrifugal application" (1) (suitable for constant torque application also).
At the end of the sequence, parameter value is automatically set back to "Disabled"
Motor Synchronous
Induction technology ? (Permanent magnet)
Induction motor LSRPM Permanent Magnet motor
Set Ctr.02 (11.30) Control mode = "Induction motor: Set Ctr.02 (11.30) Control mode = "PM: Oriented flux
voltage vector ctrl" (1) ctrl. (LSRPM)" (4)
Check Ctr.03 (05.18) Switching frequency = value Check Ctr.03 (05.18) Switching frequency = value shown
shown on motor nameplate "minFsw" (see NOTE 2) on motor nameplate "minFsw" (see NOTE 2)
Set Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Stationary: motor data Set Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Stationary: motor data
completed" (1) completed" (1)
A B

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Caution
A Parameters must be entered as shown on B
/ nameplate (including decimals).
#
! " Set induction

motor parameters from nameplate
! " Set PM motor parameters from nameplate

• Mtr.01 (05.06) Motor rated Frequency (Hz) • Mtr.01 (05.06) Motor rated Frequency (Hz)
• Mtr.02 (05.07) Motor rated current (Amps) • Mtr.02 (05.07) Motor rated current (Amps)
'
• Mtr.03 (05.08) Motor rated speed (rpm) • Mtr.03 (05.08) Motor rated speed (rpm)
• Mtr.04 (05.09) Motor rated voltage (V)


. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

• Mtr.05 (05.10) Rated power factor

• Mtr.06 (05.70) Motor thermal protection management

!
"##)

• Mtr.06 (05.70) Motor thermal protection management (if PTC is connected to DI1/CTP terminals, set

(if PTC is connected
to DI1/CTP terminals, set Mtr.06 = Control board terminal (1))

Mtr.06 = Control board terminal (1)) • Mtr.08 (05.24) d-axis inductance (mH)

#+*
• Mtr.09 (05.33) Motor volt per 1000 rpm, Ke (V)
Mtr.04 (05.09) Mtr.01 (05.06) Mtr.05 (05.10)
/ Mtr.04 (05.09) Mtr.01 (05.06) Mtr.02 (05.07)
# 0
! " "
! " "

'
5

. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

!
"##)

#+)
/ "
Mtr.03 (05.08) Mtr.02 (05.07)

#
Mtr.03 (05.08) Mtr.08 (05.24) Mtr.09 (05.33)
! "

! "

'
" 5
Main operating parameters

. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

• Spd.01 (01.06)
Maximum

reference
clamp (rpm)
!
"##)
Before setting the maximum speed, check that
• Spd.06 (02.11) Acceleration rate (s/1000rpm)

the motor and the driven machine can withstand it.
• Spd.07 (02.21)
Deceleration

rate (s/1000rpm)

"

##)
Wish
to trip on
Yes minimum speed No
threshold
?
Minimum Speed trip settings

• Apl.08 (12.84) Minimum Speed Threshold (rpm)
• Apl.09 (12.87) User trip 1. Enable User trip 1 which will
be displayed on HMI
• Apl.10 (12.88) Masking time (s). Masking used to delay
detection of minimum speed to avoid
detection on starting

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Run Autotune sequence
• Close STO-1 and STO-2 to enable the drive. HMI displays "Ready"
• Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to
"Ready" once completed
• Open Run command when sequence is completed
Application is ready to be operated
Parameter settings are automatically memorized in drive control board. However it is possible to make a copy in
the HMI using procedure described in section 2.2.3.3
NOTE 1
-
ratio) some instabilities may be experienced with default settings). For those cases, parameters Spd.09 & Spd.10 may be used
to tune the system.
- To help supervising the behavior of the motor during tuning, the MDX-SOFT PC tool can be used with a laptop connected to the
MDX-SOFT to supervise the speed reference (03.01), the
motor speed (05.04) and the motor current (04.01).
NOTE 2
In the event the minimum switching frequency is not available (hidden nameplate), set:
-
- according to the table below for other LSRPM motors.
Rated Speed Minimum Switching Frequency
For induction motor, keep the factory setting.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.5 - Quick start procedure in oriented flux control with speed feedback (induction
or LSRPM motor)
This quick start is suitable to control an induction motor (e.g LSES) or a permanent magnet motor (e.g LSRPM) with a speed
feedback from drive default settings. For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder will be considered here.

• U,V,W motor terminals are respectively connected to U, V and W terminals of the drive. Motor will run clockwise looking
at DE when run forward is enabled. If not appropriate use parameter Ctr.12 to reverse direction rather than crossing
cables

Set Ctr.01 (11.43) = "Centrifugal application" (1) (suitable for constant torque application also).
Motor Synchronous
Induction motor LSRPM Permanent Magnet motor
Set Ctr.02 (11.30) Control mode = "Induction motor: oriented Set Ctr.02 (11.30) Control mode = "PM: Oriented flux ctrl.
flux ctrl" (2) (LSRPM)" (4)
Check Ctr.03 (05.18) Switching frequency = value shown Check Ctr.03 (05.18) Switching frequency = value shown
on motor nameplate "minFsw" (see NOTE 2) on motor nameplate "minFsw" (see NOTE 2)
Set Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Stationary: motor data Set Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Stationary: motor data
completed" (1) completed" (1)
A B

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Caution
A Parameters must be entered as shown on B
/ nameplate (including decimals).
#
! "
Set induction motor parameters ! "

from nameplate

Set PM motor parameters from nameplate

• Mtr.01 (05.06) Motor rated Frequency (Hz) • Mtr.01 (05.06) Motor rated Frequency (Hz)

• Mtr.02 (05.07) Motor rated current (Amps) • Mtr.02 (05.07) Motor rated current (Amps)
'
• Mtr.03 (05.08) Motor rated speed (rpm) • Mtr.03 (05.08) Motor rated speed (rpm)


. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

• Mtr.05 (05.10) Rated power factor

• Mtr.06 (05.70) Motor thermal protection management

• Mtr.06 (05.70) Motor thermal protection

!
"##)
management (if PTC is connected to DI1/CTP terminals, set

(if PTC is connected
to DI1/CTP terminals, set
Mtr.06 = Control board terminal (1))
Mtr.06= Control

board terminal (1)) • Mtr.08 (05.24) d-axis inductance (mH)

#+*
• Mtr.09 (05.33) Motor volt per 1000 rpm, Ke (V)
Mtr.04 (05.09) Mtr.01 (05.06) Mtr.05 (05.10)
/ Mtr.04 (05.09) Mtr.01 (05.06) Mtr.02 (05.07)
# 0
! " "
! " "

'
5

. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

!
"##)

#+)
/ "

Mtr.03 (05.08) Mtr.02 (05.07)
#
Mtr.03 (05.08) Mtr.08 (05.24) Mtr.09 (05.33)
! "

! "

Set encoder parameters Set encoder parameters

'
" 5
• Mtr.10 (03.38) Encoder

type = "Incremental" (0) • Mtr.10 (03.38) Encoder type = "Incremental U,V,W" (3)

. '( )* + ,- $%&' ()"*()

• Mtr.11 (03.34) Encoder lines per revolution

• Mtr.11 (03.34) Encoder lines per revolution
!
"##)
(default = 1024 Ipr)
(default = 1024 Ipr)
• Mtr.12 (03.36)Encoder

supply voltage (5V (0) or 15V (1))

• Mtr.12 (03.36) Encoder supply voltage (5V (0) or 15V (1))

"

##)
Main operating parameters
• Spd.01 (01.06) Maximum reference clamp (rpm) Before setting the maximum speed, check that
• Spd.06 (02.11) Acceleration rate (s/1000rpm) the motor and the driven machine can withstand it.
• Spd.07 (02.21) Deceleration rate (s/1000rpm)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Wish
to trip on
threshold
?
• Apl.09 (12.87) User trip 1. Enable User trip 1 which will
be displayed on HMI
• Apl.10 (12.88) Masking time (s). Masking used to delay
detection of minimum speed to avoid
detection on starting
Motor Synchronous
Run Autotune sequence Run Autotune sequence

• Close STO-1 and STO-2 to enable the drive. • Close STO-1 and STO-2 to enable the drive.
HMI displays "Ready" HMI displays "Ready"
• Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI • Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI
displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to
"Ready" once completed "Ready" once completed
• Open Run command when sequence is completed • Open Run command when sequence is completed
• Set Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Encoder offset measure
/ Rotor parking" to select the second required autotune.
• Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI
displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to
Set Spd.09 (03.10) Speed loop proportional gain and Spd.10 (03.11) Speed loop integral gain to adjust the stability of the motor
speed with MDX-SOFT
NOTE 1
To help supervising the behavior of the motor during tuning, the MDX-SOFT PC tool can be used with a laptop connected to the
MDX-SOFT to supervise the speed reference (03.01),
the motor speed (05.04) and the motor current (04.01).
NOTE 2
In the event the minimum switching frequency is not available (hidden nameplate), set the switching frequency according to the table
setting.
Rated Speed Minimum Switching Frequency

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
4.6 - Quick start procedure of a LSHRM motor
considered here as an optional speed feedback as it is the standard for Dyneo+ motors.

• U,V,W motor terminals are respectively connected to U, V and W terminals of the drive. Motor will run
clockwise looking at DE when run forward is enabled. If not appropriate use parameter Ctr.12 (05.59) to reverse
direction rather than crossing cables


Set Ctr.01 (11.43) Factory settings = "Centrifugal application" (1) (suitable for constant torque application also)
LSHRM Permanent Magnet motor technology
Set Ctr.02 (11.30) Control mode = "PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM)" (6)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Set motor parameters from motor design or nameplate
• Mtr.01 (05.06) Motor rated Frequency (Hz) • Mtr.09 (05.33) Motor volt per 1000 rpm, Ke (V)
• Mtr.02 (05.07) Motor rated current (Amps) • Mtr.14 (05.76) Design Base current, DBC (A)
• Mtr.03( 05.08) Motor rated speed (rpm) • Mtr.15 (05.72) q-axis inductance @ no load (mH)
• Mtr.04 (05.09) Motor rated voltage (V) • Mtr.16 (05.78) q-axis inductance @ DBC (mH)
• Mtr.07 (05.50) Motor ventilation. Set Not cooled (0) • Mtr.17 (05.87) Phase offset @ DBC (°)
or Self cooled (1) or Forced cooled (2) • Mtr.18 (05.86) Partial load phase offset (°)
• Mtr.08 (05.24) d-axis inductance (mH)
Mtr.02 (05.07)
Mtr.03 (05.08)
Mtr.01 (05.06)
Mtr.04 (05.09)
Mtr.14 (05.76) Mtr.17 (05.87)
Mtr.09 (05.33) Mtr.18 (05.86)
Mtr.08 (05.24)
Mtr.15 (05.72) Mtr.16 (05.78)
CAUTION
• Parameters must be entered as shown on nameplate (including decimals). Motor rated current
must NOT be set to a higher value than the plated one.
• Motor PTC sensor must be connected to DI1/CTP and 0V teminals of the drive (managed by
default).
Run Autotune sequence
• Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Stationary: motor data completed" (1)

• Close STO-1 and STO-2 to enable the drive. HMI displays "Ready"
• Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
Set main operating parameters
• Spd.01 (01.06) Maximum reference clamp (rpm)

• Spd.06 (02.11) Acceleration rate (s/1000 rpm) Before setting the maximum speed, check that
• Spd.07 (02.21) Deceleration rate (s/1000 rpm) the motor and the driven machine can withstand it.
CAUTION : If there is no speed feedback sensor and if the application needs both directions of rotation,
Ctr.07 (01.10) must be set to Yes (1).
NOTE : 02.08 Standard ramp voltage (V) is to be set to 750 Vdc if mains supply voltage is higher than 440 Vac.
Wish
to trip on
threshold
?

• Apl.09 (12.87) User trip 1. Enable User trip 1
which will be displayed on HMI
• Apl.10 (12.88) Masking time (s). Masking used to
delay detection of minimum speed
to avoid detection on starting
Is a
resolver
Yes fitted to No
the motor?
Set resolver feedback (MDX-RESOLVER option is needed)
• Mtr.10 (03.38) Encoder type = Resolver (10)

For standard resolver mounted on LSHRM motors, you need to set parameters as follows:
• 03.56 Resolver filter = 1 (default setting)
• 03.57 Resolver polarity = 2 poles (0) (default setting)
• 03.58 Resolver transformation ratio = 2:1 (1)
• 03.59 Resolver resolution = 16 bits (3)
Run Autotune sequence (second)
• Ctr.14 (05.12) Autotune = "Encoder offset measure / signal injection (4)

• Give a run command to start Autotune sequence. HMI displays "Autotune" during the sequence and reverts to "Ready" once
completed

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
QUICK SETUP MODE
NOTE
-
ratio) some instabilities may be experienced with default settings). For those cases, Spd.09 (03.10) Proportional gain, Spd.10
(03.11) Integral gain and 05.31
- To help supervising the behavior of the motor during tuning, the MDX-SOFT PC tool can be used with a laptop connected to
MDX-SOFT to supervise the speed reference
(03.01), the motor speed (05.04) and the motor current (04.01).
4.7 - Brake control sequence
Ctr.02 = Induction motor: voltage vector ctrl.
Run/Stop command
Drive active
Apl.02 Current
Apl.03 Apl.04
Frequency
Apl.05 Apl.06
Ramp hold
(internal function)
Brake control
Ctr.02 = Induction motor: oriented flux ctrl.
Run/Stop command
Drive active
7/8
Nominal flux or
Elapsed flux Current magnitude
installation time
Apl.04 Speed
Apl.06 Ramp hold

(internal function)
Apl.05 1 sec.
Brake control

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5 - ADVANCED PARAMETER-SETTING MODE
5.1 - Introduction
• Before setting the drive parameters using the diagrams, all instructions relating to installation, connection and
commissioning of the drive must have been trickly observed (manuals supplied with the drive).
5.1.1 - Menu organisation
QUICK PARAMETER SETTING

Refer to section 4
PX1
+10V ref MENU 7 MENU 1 MENU 2 MENU 3
AI1+
AI1- Analog I/O Speed references Speed feeback
and limitations sensor option,
AI2+ Ramps
Control T°C alarms, speed
AI2-
thresholds
0V
AI3
AO1
DI1/CTP MENU 14 MENU 20 MENU 10
Speed
0V
Specific Drive states feedback
PID controller applications and diagnostics option
PX2
+24V ref
Serial link
DO1
STO-1
MENU 8 MENU 6 MENU 11 MENU 4
DI2
DI3 Digital I/O Programmable
Drive Current and
STO-2 logic and timers
configuration, torque control
DI4 serial link
DI5
+24V ref
MENU 9 MENU 12 MENU 16 MENU 5

PLC functions Motor control
Comparator and
Logic functions function blocks
PX3
COM-RL1
RL1
COM-RL2 MENU 17
Diagnostics MENU 21
RL2
MENU 19 Second
MENU 15 MENU 18 MENU 13
motor map
Additional I/O Fieldbus option, Regen mode Grid management
additional I/O
AFE
L1 U
L2 V
L3 W

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.1.2 - Explanations of symbols used
01.06 : A number in bold refers to a parameter.
DI2 : Refers to a drive input or output terminal.
01.21 : Parameters which appear in a rectangle are parameters with Read and Write access.
They can be designated as an assignment destination for connection to:
- Digital inputs for bit parameters
- Analog inputs for non-bit parameters
- Outputs of internal functions (comparators, logical or arithmetic operations, etc)
01.01 : Parameters which appear in a diamond are parameters with Read Only access and are write-protected.
They are used to provide information concerning operation of the drive and can be designated as an
assignment source for connection to:
- Digital outputs for bit parameters
- Analog outputs for non-bit parameters
- Inputs of internal functions (comparators, logical or arithmetic operations, etc)
01.36 : Parameters which appear in a hexagon are parameters which can only be assigned to:
- Digital inputs for bit parameters
- Analog inputs for non-bit parameters
- Destinations of internal functions (comparators, logical or arithmetical operations, etc.)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.2 - Menu 1: Speed references and limitations
5.2.1 - Menu 1 diagrams
• Selection of reference (speed)
AI1+ AI1- AI2+ AI2- DI1/PTC DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5
Menu 7
Menu 8
01.47 01.45 Preset Ref. Ref. select using

selection 01.42 01.41 digital inputs
Analog 01.46
reference
2 +1 +1
01.37 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
+1 +1
2 0 0 1 0 1 2
+1 +1
3 0 1 0 1 0 3
+1 +1
4 0 1 1 1 1 4
+1
Analog 5 1 0 0
reference +1 Selected
6 1 0 1
1 +1 reference 0
01.36 7 1 1 0
8 +1 1 1 1 Preset selected indicator
reference indicator 1 1
2 2
Preset 1 to 8 01.49 3 3
selector 4
01.15 01.50 4
0
1
01.14
1 to 8 Reference
>1 selector
0 1
1 to 8
RP1 01.21
>1
RP2 01.22 0
1
RP3 01.23
Speed
2 Pre-offset reference
3 reference selected
RP4 01.24 1
2
4 +
3 01.60 01.01 A
5 +
RP5 01.25 Power-up keypad
6
PWR
control mode reference 4

01.51 Reference
RP6 01.26 7
offset select
8
Keypad reference 01.09
RP7 01.27 0 1
01.17
Percentage trim Reference
offset
Ref.
RP8 01.28 x (100 + 01.38 ) 01.04
100

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Limiting and filters
DI1/CTP DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5
MENU 8
MENU 6
Reverse
select indicator
Jog select Reference
indicator enable indicator
01.13 01.12 01.11
Bipolar
reference 01.10 OR Maximum Minimum
enable reference reference
clamp clamp
01.06 01.07
Skips
01.06
1 2
01.29 01.31 Speed
A 01.07
Menu 20 01.30 01.32 Reference
01.06 band
0
1 0 Pre-skip
0 X(-1) Pre-ramp
01.06 filter
0 reference
1 B B’ reference
1 0
1 1 Menu 2
01.06 01.02 01.03
Jog
reference Reference in
skip zone 01.35
01.05

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.2.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 1 01.09 : Reference offset select
Range: Ref. x 01.38 (0) or Ref. + 01.04 (1)
Factory setting: Ref. x 01.38 (0)
01.01 : Speed reference selected
Ref. x 01.38 (0):
Range: ± 01.06 A value proportional to this reference is added to the main
reference. The percentage is adjusted using parameter 01.38
Indicates the speed reference value. (see explanation for 01.38).
Ref. + 01.04 (1):
: Pre-skip filter reference 01.04 is added to the main reference.
01.02
Range: ± 01.06 or 01.07 to 01.06 01.10 : Bipolar reference enable

Range
Speed reference after limiting but before the skips.
No (0):
01.03 : Pre-ramp reference All negative references are treated as invalid.
Yes (1):
Range: ± 01.06 or 01.07 to 01.06
Used for changing the direction of rotation by the polarity of
the reference (which may come from the preset references).
Indicates the speed reference after the skips but before the
acceleration or deceleration ramps. CAUTION:
If a LSHRM motor has no speed feedback sensor and if
01.04 : Reference offset the application needs both directions of rotation, 01.10
Range: ± 01.06 must be set to Yes (1).
Factory setting: 0.00 rpm
This reference is added to (positive value) or subtracted 01.11 : Run command

from (negative value) the selected reference if 01.09 is set to
Ref. + 01.04 (1). It can be used to correct the selected main Range: Stop (0) or Run (1)
reference to obtain an accurate setting.
Used to control enabling of the run command.
01.05 : Jog reference
Range: 0.00 to 01.06
01.12 : Reverse select indicator
06.31 = 1. Range: Run forward (0) or Run reverse (1)
01.06 : Maximum reference clamp Run forward (0):

Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm forward.
Run reverse (1):
reverse.
Maximum speed in both directions of rotation.
• Before setting the maximum limit, check that 01.13 : Jog select indicator
the motor and the driven machine can
withstand it. Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
01.07 : Minimum reference clamp

Disabled (0):
Range: 0.00 to 01.06 rpm
Jog operation disabled.
Enabled (1):
Jog operation enabled.
bipolar mode).
CAUTION: 01.14 : Reference selector
• This parameter is inactive during jog operation. Range: Terminal inputs (0), Analog input 1 (1),
• If the value of 01.06 is lower than that of 01.07, the value
of 01.07 is automatically changed to the new value of Factory setting: Terminal inputs (0)
01.06.
Terminal inputs (0):
01.08 : Not used The speed reference is selected by combining the digital
inputs assigned to parameters 01.41 and 01.42.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Analog input 1 (1):
The speed reference comes from differential analog input 1 01.35 : Reference in skip zone
(AI1+, AI1-).
Analog input 2 (2): Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
(AI2+, AI2-). This parameter is Enabled (1) when the selected reference is
within one of the skip zones.
Preset reference (3):
In this case, the motor speed does not correspond to the
The speed reference comes from the preset references
requested reference.
Keypad (4):
01.36 and 01.37 : Analog references 1 and 2
The speed reference comes from the parameter-setting
interface (see section 2.2.4). Range: 01.07 to 01.06 (01.10 = 0)
± 01.06 (01.10 = 1)
01.15 : Preset selector
The analog inputs assigned to these parameters are
Range: Terminal inputs (0),
to the maximum reference (01.06
Factory setting: Terminal input (0)
level will correspond to the minimum reference 01.07 or 0
according to 01.10.
This parameter is used to select the preset references.
• Unipolar mode (01.10 = 0)
Terminal input (0):
Reference
Used to select the reference by combining the digital inputs
assigned to parameters 01.45 to 01.47. 01.06
Preset reference 1 to Preset reference 8:
01.07
01.16 : Not used
01.17 : Keypad reference 0

100.0 %
Range: ± 01.06
• Bipolar mode (01.10 = 1)
Used to set the speed reference value by means of the Reference
parameter-setting interface (see section 2.2.4).
01.06
01.18 to 01.20 : Not used

+ 100.0
- 100.0 %
01.21 to 01.28 : Preset ref. 1 to Preset ref. 8
Range: ± 01.06 rpm
Factory setting: 0.00 rpm 01.06
In order, 01.21 to 01.28

01.38 : Percentage trim
01.29 and 01.31 : Skip references 1 and 2

Format: 16 bits
Range: 0.00 to 01.06
An offset proportional to the selected reference can be added
to this reference.
Two skips are available to avoid a machine running at
input assigned to 01.38.
critical speeds. When one of these parameters is at 0, the
Selected ref. x (01.38 + 100)
corresponding skip reference is deactivated. Final ref =
100
01.30 and 01.32 : Skip reference bands 1 and 2 01.39 and 01.40 : Not used
will therefore equal the threshold set ± skip reference band.

When the absolute value of the reference is within the window
determined in this way, the drive will prevent operation in this
zone.
01.33 and 01.34 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
01.41 : Reference select via digital input (bit 0)
01.50 : Preset selected reference indicator
01.42 : Reference select via digital input (bit 1)
Range: Ana 1/Preset (0) or Ana 2/Keypad (1) (01.41)
Ana 1/Ana 2 (0) or Preset/Keypad (1) (01.42)
Indicates the value selected by 01.15.
Used to assign the digital inputs to selection of the speed
reference. 01.51 : Power-up keypad control mode reference
01.41: bit 0 Range: Reset to 0 (0), Last value (1), Preset 1 (2)
01.42: bit 1 Factory setting: Reset to 0 (0)
01.14 01.42 01.41 Value

Selected reference
01.49 Reset to 0 (0):
0 0 1 Analog input 1 On power-up, the speed reference coming from the
0 1 2 Analog input 2 parameter-setting interface is reset to zero.
0 Last value (1):
1 0 Preset reference
1 1 4 Keypad On power-up, the speed reference coming from the
parameter-setting interface retains the value it had before
01.43 and 01.44 : Not used power-down.
Preset 1 (2):
01.45 to 01.47 : Preset Ref. selection On power-up, the speed reference coming from the
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) parameter-setting interface takes the value of preset
reference 1 (01.21).
Used to assign the digital inputs to selection of the preset
references. 01.52 to 01.59 : Not used
01.45: bit 0
01.46: bit 1
01.47: bit 2 01.60 : Pre-offset reference
01.15 01.47 01.46 01.45 Value Selected Range: ± 01.06

01.50 reference
Preset reference 1 Indicates the value of the selected speed reference before offset.
0 0 0 1
(PR1)
Preset reference 2 01.61 to 01.78 : Not used
0 0 1 2
(PR2)
Preset reference
0 1 0
Preset reference 4
0 1 1 4
(PR4)
0
1 0 0
Preset reference 6
1 0 1 6
(PR6)
Preset reference 7
1 1 0 7
(PR7)
1 1 1
01.48 : Not used
01.49 : Reference selected indicator
Range: Analog input 1 (1), Analog input 2 (2),
Indicates the value selected by 01.14.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.3 - Menu 2: Ramps
• Acceleration ramps
Menu 9
Binary sum
output 09.32
0
1 Acceleration
1 rate selector
2
2
02.10
Preset selected
reference indicator
8
8
Menu 1 9
01.50
Acceleration rate 1 02.11

1
2
Acceleration rate 3 02.13 3
4
5
6
Acceleration rate 6 02.16 Jog acceleration Jog select
7 rate indicator
Acceleration rate 7 02.17 8 1
0
02.19
01.13 A
Single ramp Double ramps

Pre-ramp
reference
Run FWD 02.53
Menu 1
01.03 B
02.54
Run REV
02.53
Special ramp Special ramp

02.52 = 0 or 2 02.52 = 1 or 3
validation validation
0
S ramp
acceleration limit
1
02.07
S ramp
02.06 enabled

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Deceleration ramps
Menu 9
Binary sum
output 09.32
0
1 Deceleration
1 rate selector
2
2 02.20
Preset selected
reference indicator
8
8
Menu 1 9
01.50
Deceleration rate 1 02.21

1
Deceleration rate 2 02.22 2
Deceleration rate 3 02.23 3

4
5
6
7
8
Jog deceleration
rate
1
02.29 0
A
Ramp bypass
Single ramp Double ramps ( )
Menu 4
Current 02.02
02.53 loop
Run FWD
Post ramp
0 reference
B 02.55
Menu 3
Run REV 02.01
02.53
1
Special ramp 02.52 = 0 or 1 Special ramp 02.52 = 2 or 3

validation validation
02.04 Deceleration ramp mode select Ramp hold

02.03 Ramp hold
02.08 Standard ramp voltage condition
02.50 Speed reference locked at motor speed 0 1
02.51
02.54 High speed acceleration ramp
0 1
02.55 High speed deceleration ramp
02.56 Accel/Decel speed reference V min
0 0
C

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.3.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 2 Fixed ramp + (3):
ramp is too fast, the drive trips on DC bus overvoltage.

02.01 : Post ramp reference CAUTION:
In mode 2 and 3, the motor must be capable of
Range: • If 01.10 = 0 and 02.02 = 0: 0 to 01.06 withstanding additional losses relating to the increase in
• If 01.10 = 0 and 02.02 = 1: 01.07 to 01.06 voltage at its terminals.
• If 01.10 = 1: ± 01.06
02.05 : Not used
Measurement of the post-ramp reference. Used for diagnostics.
02.06 : S ramp enabled
02.02 : Ramp bypass ( )
Range: Off (0) or On (1)
Factory setting: Off (0)
No (0):
Off (0): The ramp is linear.
Active ramps. Yes (1):
On (1): 02.07) at the start and end of the
Ramps short-circuited. ramp avoids load swinging.
CAUTION:
02.03 : Ramp hold The S ramp is disabled during controlled decelerations
Range (02.04 = Automatic ramp (1) or Automatic ramp + (2)).
02.07 : S ramp acceleration limit

No (0): Range: 2 to 10
Ramp freed. Factory setting: 10
Format: 16 bits
Yes (1):
Used to modify the ramp curve by the same value at the start
The ramp is held and acceleration (or deceleration) is
and end of the ramp.
therefore interrupted.
CAUTION:
The ramp hold function is disabled if a stop command is
NOTE
given.
In S ramp mode, the total ramp time will be greater than that
of the selected ramp.
02.04 : Deceleration ramp mode select
Range: Fixed ramp (0), Automatic ramp (1),
02.08 : Standard ramp voltage
Factory setting: Automatic ramp (1)
Format: 16 bits
Fixed ramp (0):

Deceleration ramp imposed. If the deceleration ramp that has mode (02.04 = Automatic ramp (1) or Automatic ramp + (2)).
the DC bus voltage exceeds its maximum value (set in 02.08) than the DC bus voltage obtained with the maximum supply
and the drive trips on DC bus overvoltage.
CAUTION: to, the motor performs a freewheel stop. If this threshold is too
Set 02.04 = Fixed ramp (0) when a braking resistor is high and there are no resistors connected, the drive will trip
being used. on DC bus overvoltage.
Automatic ramp (1): 02.09 : Not used
Standard deceleration ramp with automatic extension of
the ramp time in order to avoid causing a drive DC bus
02.10 : Acceleration rate selector
overvoltage trip (threshold set in 02.08).
Automatic ramp + (2):
The drive allows the motor voltage to be increased up to 1.2 Related to preset speed (9)
times the rated voltage set in 05.09 (motor rated voltage), Factory setting: Acceleration rate 1 (1)
to avoid reaching the maximum DC bus voltage threshold
(threshold set in 02.08 This parameter is used to select the acceleration ramp as
the standard deceleration ramp time is extended, to avoid follows:
causing a drive DC bus overvoltage trip.
For the same amount of energy, mode 2 enables faster
Selection of the acceleration ramp via digital inputs. The
deceleration than mode 1.
choice of ramp comes from the binary/decimal converter in
menu 9 (09.32).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Acceleration rate 1 (1) to Acceleration rate 8 (8): 02.20 : Deceleration rate selector
Related to preset speed (9):
The ramp is automatically associated with the corresponding Related to preset speed (9)
preset speed. Factory setting: Deceleration rate 1 (1)
NOTE
If you are using the binary sum, the value of the offset 09.34 This parameter is used to select the deceleration ramp as
must at least equal 1 so that 09.32 > 0. follows:
02.11 to 02.18 : Acceleration rates 1 to 8 Selection of the deceleration ramp via digital inputs. The
* choice of ramp comes from the binary/decimal converter in
Factory setting: 20.0 s menu 9 (09.32).
Format: 16 bits Deceleration rate 1 (1) to Deceleration rate 8 (8):
Sets the time for acceleration from 0 to 1000 rpm *.
02.11 to 02.18 = t(s) x 1000 rpm * Related to preset speed (9):
(N2 - N1) rpm
The ramp is automatically associated with the corresponding
N (rpm) preset speed.
NOTE
1000 If you are using the binary sum, the value of the offset 09.34
must at least equal 1 so that 09.32 > 0.
N2
02.21 to 02.28 : Deceleration rates 1 to 8

*
N1 Factory setting: 20.0 s
Format: 16 bits
0 t (s) Sets the time for deceleration from 1000 rpm * to 0.
t
Value of 02.11 to 02.18 02.21 to 02.28 = t(s) x 1000 rpm *

(N2 - N1) rpm
02.11: Acceleration rate 1 (main ramp in factory settings) N (rpm)

1000
02.12 to 02.18
N2
* NOTE
The reference speed can be changed from 1000 to 100 rpm
using parameter 02.56. This makes it possible to multiply the
acceleration and deceleration times by 10. N1
02.19 : Jog acceleration rate 0 t (s)

t
*
Factory setting: 0.2 s Value of 02.21 to 02.28
Format: 16 bits
Sets the time for acceleration from 0 to 1000 rpm *. 02.21: Deceleration rate 1 (main ramp in factory settings)
02.22 to 02.28
02.19 = t(s) x 1000 rpm *
(N2 - N1) rpm * NOTE
N (rpm) using parameter 02.56. This makes it possible to multiply the
1000 acceleration and deceleration times by 10.
N2
N1
0 t (s)
t
Value of 02.19
* NOTE
acceleration and deceleration times by 10.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
02.29 : Jog deceleration rate 02.51 : Ramp hold condition
* Range: Always (0) or Speed > 01.07 (1)
Factory setting: 0.2 s Factory setting: Always (0)
Format: 16 bits
Sets the time for deceleration from 1000 rpm * to 0. Always (0):
When 02.03 = Yes (1), the ramp is always held.
02.29 = t(s) x 1000 rpm *
(N2 - N1) rpm Speed > 01.07 (1):
N (rpm)
When 02.03 = Yes (1), the ramp is freed between 0 and V min
1000 (01.07), above this speed the ramp is locked.
N2 02.52 : Special ramp validation

Range: Disabled (0), 2 acceleration ramps (1),
2 deceleration ramps (2),
N1 Factory setting: Disabled (0)
0 t (s) Disabled (0):

t
Value of 02.29 Double ramps not enabled.
2 acceleration ramps (1):
* NOTE
The reference speed can be changed from 1000 to 100 rpm in 02.53 02.11
using parameter 02.56. This makes it possible to multiply the to 02.19. From 02.53
acceleration and deceleration times by 10. in 02.54.
2 deceleration ramps (2):
02.30 to 02.49 : Not used Double ramps on deceleration. The drive decelerates to the
02.53
02.50 : Speed reference locked at motor speed 02.55 02.21
to 02.28.
Factory setting: Yes (1) 2 acceleration deceleration ramps (3):
Double ramps on acceleration and deceleration. The drive
In applications with high inertia, the actual speed does not 02.53,
necessarily manage to follow the ramp reference. In this and the acceleration and deceleration ramps used are those
case, on a stop command or change of reference, an idle 02.11 to 02.19 and 02.21 to 02.29 respectively.
time, linked to the difference between the reference and the From 02.53, the acceleration and deceleration ramps used
actual speed, can occur. By enabling 02.50, the speed and 02.54 and 02.55 respectively.
ramp are locked, so that the idle time disappears.
02.53 : Speed threshold for accel./decel.
02.50 = No (0) Range: ± 01.06
Speed Reference (01.03: pre-ramp reference)
Ramped reference (02.01: post-ramp reference)
Actual speed (05.04: motor speed)
See explanation in 02.52.
02.54 : High speed acceleration ramp

*
Idle
time Factory setting: 20.0 s
Format: 16 bits
See explanation in 02.52 and 02.56.
Time
* NOTE
02.50 = Yes (1)
Speed
Reference (01.03: pre-ramp reference)
Ramped reference (02.01: post-ramp reference) acceleration and deceleration times by 10.
Actual speed (05.04: motor speed)
02.55 : High speed deceleration ramp
*
Factory setting: 20.0 s
Format: 16 bits
See explanation in 02.52 and 02.56.
* NOTE
Time The reference speed can be changed from 1000 to 100 rpm

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
02.56 : Accel/Decel speed reference
Range: 1000 min-1 (0) or 100 min-1 (1)
Factory setting: 1000 min-1 (0)
This parameter is used to change the speed reference for the

acceleration and deceleration times.
This parameter affects parameters 02.11 to 02.19, 02.21 to
02.29 and 02.54 to 02.55.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.4 - Menu 3: Encoder option, Alarms, Speed thresholds
• Basic version
Remanent frequency
Output 03.90
frequency Motor
Menu 2 Menu 5 05.01 M

Motor
Motor control
speed 05.04
Menu 10
Zero speed
Zero speed threshold
03.05 +
10.03
- Running at
Minimum reference clamp minimum speed
01.07 +
10.04
-
Maximum
reference Vmax alarm Vmax
clamp threshold alarm
01.06 - 03.52 +
10.52
-
Maximum
Maximum reference clamp speed
01.06 +
10.53
-
Reference At speed
threshold Below set
speed
01.03 - 03.06
+
2 At speed
10.05
-
At speed
Reference threshold Above set 10.06
speed
01.03 + 03.06
-
2 10.07
+
Frequency input
Frequency
input Max frequency Frequency input
source input reference reference destination
03.61 03.43 03.46
Input Frequency
frequency input Frequency
reference input
100% reference scale
Frequency 03.62 03.45 03.44
conversion
0

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• With encoder and resolver option
Speed gain Speed loop

select gains
Post ramp Final speed Speed 03.16 Speed control
03.10 Kp1
reference demand error output
+ 0 03.11 Ki1
Menu 2
02.01 03.01 03.03 03.04
- 03.13 Kp2
1
03.14 Ki2
Menu 10
Zero speed threshold 03.05 + Zero
Motor 10.03 speed
speed -
03.02 Minimum +
speed 01.07
Selection of encoder 10.04
to be checked -
03.26 Minimum
speed
Encoder type Maximum Vmax alarm Vmax
reference clamp threshold alarm
03.38
01.06 - 03.52 +
Encoder phase Resolver 10.52
angle filter -
Maximum
03.25 03.56 Maximum reference clamp speed
Encoder lines Resolver 01.06 +

Encoder per revolution polarity 10.53
or 03.57 -
Resolver 03.34
Resolver At speed Below
Encoder supply transformation Reference threshold set
voltage ratio speed
03.36 03.58 - 03.06
01.03 +
At speed
Drive encoder Resolver 2 10.05
-
filter resolution
03.42 03. 59 At speed Above
Reference threshold set 10.06
speed
Drive + 03.06 -
01.03
encoder 03.29 Resolver 2 10.07
03.55 speed
position +
03.17 Speed gain set-up 03.27 Encoder speed feedback 03.90 Remanent frequency
03.18 Motor ans load inertia 03.92 Remanent voltage value 03.91 Remanent voltage measure
Frequency input
Motor
speed Frequency input
Input from +100%
reference destination
encoder 03.02 03.46
Frequency
Frequency -100% input
input source
Max frequency reference
03.61 input reference 03.43 1
Input 03.45 03.44
frequency
0 Frequency input
100%
Frequency reference
conversion 03.62 scale
03.67
0
Frequency
input select

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.4.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 3 03.10 : Speed loop proportional gain Kp1 ( )
Factory setting: 200

03.01 : Final speed reference ( ) Format: 16 bits
Used to set the amount by which the speed reference is
Range: ± 2 x 01.06 rpm exceeded following an acceleration or following a load
impact. The setting of 03.10 depends on the load inertia. The
Represents the sum of the post ramp reference and the hard factory value is suitable for low inertia. For applications with
speed reference if this has been enabled. high applied inertia (fan, centrifuge, grinders, etc), the value
of 03.10 needs to be increased.
Increase the proportional gain until vibrations occur in the
03.02 : Motor speed feedback
motor stability is acceptable in the event of sudden variations
Range: ± 2 x 01.06 rpm in speed, both at no load and on load.
NOTE
Actual speed from the encoder. The speed loop sampling period is 2 ms.
: Speed error ( ) 03.11 : Speed loop integral gain Ki1 ( )

03.03
Range: ± 2 x 01.06 rpm Factory setting: 100

Format: 16 bits
Used to set the speed loop damping. Increase the integral
feedback. gain to limit the speed recovery time following an acceleration
or following a torque impact.
NOTE
03.04 : Speed controller output ( ) The settings 03.10 and 03.11 are only active when 11.31
Format: 16 bits Use the Scope function in the MDX-Soft software to display
The speed controller output produces a torque reference to the effect of the 03.10 and 03.11 gain settings.
be used in determining the value of the active current.
03.12 : Speed loop differential gain Kd1 ( )
03.05 : Zero speed threshold Reserved.
03.13 : Speed loop proportional gain Kp2 ( )
If the motor speed 05.04 or the motor speed feedback 03.02 Factory setting: 200
Format: 16 bits
speed information 10.03 will be at 1, otherwise it will be at 0. Adjusts the stability of the motor speed in the event of sudden
In Voltage control mode, upon a stop command the drive variations in the reference.
decelerates on the selected ramp to the threshold set by The drive uses Kp1 (03.10) or Kp2 (03.13) depending on the
03.05, then the motor goes into freewheel mode. value of 03.16.
03.06 : At speed window 03.14 : Speed loop integral gain Ki2 ( )

Format: 16 bits
10.06 «At speed» alarm Adjusts the stability of the motor speed on load impact.
is activated. The drive uses Ki1 (03.11) or Ki2 (03.14) depending on the
10.06 is at 1 when the post-ramp reference equals the value of 03.16.
reference ± (03.06/2).
CAUTION: 03.15 : Speed loop differential gain Kd2 ( )
For values of 03.06 < 20, see parameters 10.05 and 10.07. Reserved.
03.07 to 03.09 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
03.16 : Speed controller gain select ( ) 03.21 : Damping factor ( )
Range: Gains # 1 (0) or Gains # 2 (1) Reserved.
Factory setting: Gains # 1 (0)
03.22 : Hard speed reference ( )
Reserved.
enabled.
Gains # 1 (0): 03.23 : Hard speed reference selector ( )
Selection of Kp1 (03.10), Ki1 (03.11) and Kd1 (03.12) gains. Reserved.
Gains # 2 (1):
Selection of Kp2 (03.13), Ki2 (03.14) and Kd2 (03.15) gains. 03.24 : Not used
03.17 : Speed gain set-up ( ) 03.25 : Position feedback phase angle ( )

Range: Manual mode 1 (0), Automatic (1),
Manual mode 2 (2) Factory setting: 0.0 °
Factory setting: Manual mode 1 (0) Format: 16 bits
Indicates the result of the phasing test performed during
Manual mode 1 (0): autotuning (see 05.12). It is stored when the drive is powered
The proportional gain is only applied to the speed feedback
signal. This checking method is recommended for process autotune.
applications where the response time is not a critical setting.
03.11 • The phase angle, where it is known, can be
Active entered manually. Any incorrect value can cause
Speed
reference current the motor to rotate in the wrong direction or trip the
+ + drive.
- +
03.10
03.26 : Selection of encoder to be checked
Speed
feedback U,V,W only (2),
Automatic (1):
Reserved.
Manual mode 2 (2): This parameter is used to check an encoder’s operation
The proportional gain is applied to the reference signal and to without the feedback information being used in the check.
the speed feedback signal. None (0):
03.10
Active Incremental (1):
Speed + current
reference Tests a quadrature incremental encoder with complemented
+ ∫ + signals A, B. Set encoder voltage in 03.36.
- U,V,W only (2):
03.11
Tests the U,V,W signals of an incremental encoder with
Speed
feedback commutation channels. Set encoder voltage in 03.36.
Incremental U,V,W (3):
Tests the A,B signals of an incremental encoder with
commutation channels. Set encoder voltage in 03.36.
03.18 : Motor and load inertia ( )
2 Hall effect sensor (4):
Factory setting: 0.000 Kg.m 2
Format: 16 bits integrated in some motors.

Corresponds to the total inertia applied to the motor (motor Resolver (5):
inertia + load inertia). Tests a resolver. Set resolver characteristics in 03.56 to 03.59.
The speed of the encoder selected in 03.26 is displayed in
03.19 : Not used 03.27.
03.20 : Bandwidth ( ) NOTE

Reserved.
03.38.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
03.38 : Encoder type
03.27 : Encoder (defined by 03.26) speed feedback Range: Incremental (0), Reserved (1), U,V,W only (2),
Range: ± 01.06
Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (6),
This parameter indicates the speed fed back by the encoder
03.26. During commissioning, this parameter
is used to ensure that the speed feedback system (from
the encoder to the MDX-Encoder option) is working. After Resolver + signal loss detection (11)
03.27 Factory setting: Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (6).
is consistent with the actual speed.
The drive must be equipped:
03.28 : Not used -
(03.38 03.38 = 4).
- With an MDX-RESOLVER option for managing resolvers
03.29 : Drive encoder position ( ) (03.38 =10 or 11).
CAUTION:
03.38 is only active for Flux Control strategies: when User
Format: 16 bits drive mode 11.31 = 2 or 3, or Motor technology selection
Indicates the position of the encoder in relation to the line it 11.30 = 2, 4 or 6).
was on at power-up NOTE
. 03.38 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology
03.30 to 03.33 : Not used selection.
03.34 : Encoder lines per revolution • If 11.30
Factory setting: 1024 lpr Incremental (0):

Format: 16 bits Speed feedback via quadrature incremental encoder with
A,A\,B,B\ signals. Related parameters: 03.34, 03.36 and
encoder revolution. Converts the encoder input into a speed. 03.42.
Reserved (1):
03.35 : Not used
U,V,W only (2):
03.36 : Encoder supply voltage
Incremental U,V,W (3):
Hall effect sensor (4):

5V (0):
Soft. 1 / Back EMF orientation (5):
15V (1): «Sensorless» mode in which the position is reconstituted
by the software. Recommended for applications where low
CAUTION: starting torque is required (pump, fan, etc).
Before selecting «15V», check that the encoder used can Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (6):
withstand this voltage. «Sensorless» mode in which the position is reconstituted
by the software. Recommended for applications where high
03.37 : Not used starting torque is required (grinder, press, extruding machine,
etc).
Soft. 3 to 5 (7, 8, 9):
Resolver (10):
level. Set resolver characteristics in 03.56 to 03.59.
Resolver + signal loss detection (11):
Resolver with monitoring of the signals feedback level.
NOTE
When 03.38 is set to one of the «software encoder» modes,
05.06 to 05.10) using the motor
nameplate data.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• If 11.30 The following parameters should be set according to the data
given on the motor nameplate:
- 05.24, 05.33, 05.51 for low saliency PM motor (5.37 = 0).
Incremental (0): - 05.24, 05.33, 05.72, 05.76, 05.78, 05.86, 05.87 for PMASR
motor (05.37 = 1).
Reserved (1):
03.39 to 03.41 : Not used

U,V,W only (2):
This selection allows use in downgraded operation of an
encoder with commutation signals whose A and B channels 03.42 : Drive encoder filter ( )
are not operational. Range: 0 to 7
Incremental U,V,W (3): Format: 16 bits
incremental encoder with A,A\,B,B\ signals and U,U\ V,V\ feedback, such that:
W,W\ commutation channels. time constant = 203.42 ms.
Hall effect sensor (4): It is particularly useful to reduce the current demand when the
03.10 or 03.11) is
effect sensors phase-shifted by 120° electrical. required on the speed controller.
Soft. 1 / Back EMF orientation (5): 03.42 = 0.
«Sensorless» mode in which the rotor position is determined NOTE
by reconstituting the motor Electro-Motive Force vector. This 03.42 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology
mode is not suitable for PM motors with high saliency ratio selection.
(PMASR) or synchronous reluctance motors. During the
starting phase the motor is parked in accordance with the 03.43 : Max frequency input reference
description in the «Current vector» mode in parameter 05.36. Range: 0.00 to 60000.00
The parking phase is especially helpful for starting large fans
or crushers.
Soft. 2 / Back EMF orientation (6):
«Sensorless» mode in which the rotor position is determined of the destination numerical value.
by reconstituting the motor Electro-Motive Force vector. This
mode is not suitable for PM motors with high saliency ratio 03.44 : Frequency input reference scale
(PMASR) or synchronous reluctance motors and applications Range: 0.000 to 2.000
where the ratio between the load inertia and the motor inertia Factory setting: 1.000
This mode is automatically selected after Format: 16 bits
setting 11.30 = PM: Oriented flux Ctrl. (LSRPM)» (4). Used for scaling the numerical reference to be converted into
Soft. 3 / Adaptive model (7): pulses.
«Sensorless» mode suitable for PMASR motor in which the
rotor position is determined from an adaptive model of the
machine in which the voltage and current values linked to 03.45 : Frequency input reference
a rotational reference frame are compared with the actual
measurements. See parameter 05.36 for starting phase. )
This mode is automatically selected after setting 11.30 = Format: 16 bits
PMASR: Oriented flux Ctrl. (LSHRM) (6). Indicates the value of the numerical reference resulting from
conversion of the pulse signal.
Soft. 4 / Stator flux orientation (8):
«Sensorless» mode in which the rotor position is determined
03.46 : Frequency input reference destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
This mode is recommended for applications using PM motors
Factory setting: 00.00
(11.30
Format: 16 bits
saliency ratio where the ratio between the load and the motor
Used to select the destination of the numerical reference
resulting from conversion of the pulse signal. Only «non-
See parameter 05.36 for starting phase.
bit» type parameters can be programmed. If an unsuitable
Soft. 5 (9): parameter is selected, 03.46 will be frozen at 0.
Resolver (10): 03.47 to 03.51 : Not used

level.
Resolver + signal loss detection (11):
Resolver with monitoring of the signals feedback level
NOTE
An autotune «Stationary: motor data completed» (05.12 = 1)
must be performed if 11.30 is set to 4 or 6 and 03.38 is set to

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
03.52 : Vmax alarm threshold 03.59 : Resolver resolution
Factory setting: 90.00 rpm Factory setting: 14 bits (2)
Triggers an alarm 10.52 when the motor speed is such that: The resolver resolution depends on the maximum resolver
- (05.04) > V max (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 in Voltage control speed (see table hereafter).
mode On the MDX-RESOLVER option, an incremental encoder
- (03.02) > Max spd (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 type output is emulated. The resolution of this output is set via
control mode (with speed feedback). parameter 03.34 «Encoder lines per revolution».
03.53 and 03.54 : Not used Maximum

Resolution Maximum value
resolver speed
03.59 of 03.34
(rpm)
03.55 : Resolver speed
10 bits (0)
Range: ± (2 x 01.06) 12 bits (1) 60000 / Pp 1024
Indicates the speed from the resolver. 14 bits (2) 4096
03.56 : Resolver filter

Pp : number of resolver pole pairs.
Factory setting: 1
Format: 16 bits 03.60 : Not used
feedback, such that:
03.61 : Frequency input source
time constant = 203.56 ms.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
03.57 : Resolver polarity Format: 16 bits
Used to select the source of pulses.
Factory setting: 2 poles (0)
NOTE
Indicates the number of resolver poles.
This value should be entered from the resolver manufacturer corresponding respectively to parameters 08.04 and 08.05.
data.
option, and set 03.67 to Encoder input (1).
03.58 : Resolver transformation ratio
Factory setting: 1:1 (0)

03.62 : Input frequency
This value should be entered from the resolver manufacturer
data.
Transformation ratio Pulse input frequency which will be converted to a numerical
Excitation voltage (Vrms)
03.58 reference.
1 : 1 (0) Application example:
Pulses from an inductive sensor connected to a digital input
2 : 1 (1) 2.6 are converted to a reference which is assigned to the speed
reference.
03.63 to 03.66 : Not used
03.67 : Frequency input select ( )

Range: Digital in (0) or Encoder in (1)
Factory setting: Digital in (0)
Digital in (0):
The 03.45 reference is generated from a frequency signal
03.61).
Encoder in (1):
The encoder signal is used to generate the frequency input
reference (see 03.45).
03.68 to 03.89 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
03.90 : Remanent frequency
Indicates the frequency of the remanent voltage present at the

motor terminals when the drive is disabled. This parameter is
reset to zero when the drive is enabled.
03.91 : Remanent voltage measure
Digital and analog with motor speed update (2),
Factory setting: Digital and analog with motor speed update

(2)
None (0):
The measurement of the motor remanent voltage is disabled.
Digital (1):
This setting should be used when the product has only a
digital information feedback.
Digital and analog with motor speed update (2):
The remanent frequency measurement combines analog and
digital information. When the run command is not active, the
motor speeds 03.02 and 05.04 are updated according to the
remanent frequency 03.90.
Digital and analog w/o motor speed update (3):
Same as previous but motor speed 03.02 and 05.04 are not
updated when the run command is disabled.
03.92 : Remanent voltage value
Range: 0 to 999V
Format: 16 bits
Rms value of the remanent voltage present at the motor
terminals when the drive is disabled.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.5 - Menu 4: Current loop - Torque control
• Voltage control
Standard 02.08
ramp voltage DC bus
voltage
monitoring
DC bus voltage 05.05
Torque regulation
mode selector
04.11
Post ramp 1
reference
Menu 2 Motor 0
02.01 mapping
User current
maximum
scaling Drive output at
04.24 current limit
Active current 10.09

demand
Torque 0
reference Current control
Motor torque per 1
04.08 amp conversion 04.04 + 1
04.13 Proportional gain
0
- 04.14 Integral gain
User current
maximum scaling
Percentage
04.24 04.20 load
Active Reactive I
current 04.02 Total I
Current
Overriding magnitude
current limit 04.18
Reactive 04.01
current
Active I
Time between 04.17
starting and
permanent torque Overload
04.51 accumulator
04.19
Symmetric
current limit 04.07
Active
Motor current
current limit 04.05 limiting
Generator
current limit 04.06

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Oriented flux control
Time between starting
and permanent
torque
04.51
Symmetric
current limit 04.07
Active
Motor current
current limit 04.05 limiting
Generator
current limit 04.06
Overriding
current limit 04.18
Speed
control Torque regulation
output mode selector
Menu 3 04.11 Current
03.04 demand filter
User current 04.12
maximum scaling
04.24 Torque Active current
0 demand demand Current control
Filter
Motor torque
Torque 1 + 04.13 Proportional
reference 04.03 per amp 04.04 t gain
+ conversion
04.14 Integral gain
04.08 -
2
-
Torque 01.06 Maximum

offset reference Reactive +
selection clamp Standard current
ramp 02.08 reference
04.10 voltage -
DC bus
Torque voltage
offset 1 monitoring
DC bus Reactive 04.17
04.09 voltage 05.05 current
Reactive I
Percentage User current Active Current
load maximum current Total I magnitude
scaling
04.20 04.24 04.02 04.01
Active I
Overload
04.15 Motor thermal time constant accumulator
04.55 Current limitation mode 04.19
04.60 Electromagnetic torque

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.5.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 4 04.07 : Symmetric current limit
04.01 : Current magnitude Format: 16 bits

Used to set the maximum permanent current limit permitted in
Range: 0.00 to 2.22 x 11.32 (A) motor mode and in generator mode.
NOTE
Reading of the rms current in each drive output phase. If 11.31 is set to Induction motor: Voltage control (1) and 05.14
This is the result of the vectorial sum of the magnetising is set to Linear U/F law with boost (2) or Square U/F law with
current and the active current. 04.07.
NOTE Motor operation
Max. drive current = 2.22 x 11.32.
No t> Yes
04.51
04.02 : Active current
Yes 04.05 No
<
Range: ± 2.22 x 11.32 04.07
04.05 04.07
Reading of the active current delivered by the drive. Motor Symmetric
The active current gives a fairly precise image of the motor current limit current limit
A negative value indicates operation in generator mode with Generator operation

driving load whereas a positive value indicates operation in
motor mode. Yes 04.06 No
<
04.07
04.03 : Torque demand

04.06 04.07
Format: 16 bits Generator Symmetric
current limit current limit
the rated motor torque.
04.08 : Torque reference
Range: ± 04.24
04.04 : Active current demand
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits control.

The current demand is the result of conversion of the torque Give a positive reference for the torque to be applied
reference 04.08 into active current. clockwise and conversely, a negative reference for the torque
04.04 = 04.03 when the drive current limit is not reached and to be applied counter-clockwise.
The maximum value of 04.08 04.24.
04.05 : Motoring current limit 04.09 : Torque offset
Format: 16 bits Format: 16 bits

Used to set the maximum starting current limit permitted in
04.51. 04.10 : Torque offset selection
When the value of 04.05 is less than 04.07, then 04.05
overrides 04.07.
04.06 : Regenerating current limit No (0):

The torque reference equals parameter 04.08.
Format: 16 bits Yes (1):

Used to set the maximum permanent current limit permitted in The torque reference equals parameter 04.08 plus the torque
generator mode. offset value 04.09.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
04.11 : Torque regulation mode selector NOTE
Range: Speed regulation (0), Direct torque (1), 04.13:
04.13 05.24 x 05.07
Factory setting: Speed regulation (0)
04.14 : Current loop integral gain
:
Factory setting: 40
Speed regulation (0): Format: 16 bits
Speed control with current limiting by parameter 04.07. The current loop stability and the overshoot in step response
Direct torque (1): of current set point are impacted by the value of 04.14. The
factory setting covers most common situations.
Controlled torque (2):
04.15 : Motor thermal time constant
:
Format: 16 bits
Speed regulation (0): Based on the current, torque and speed levels, a relative level
Speed control with current limiting by parameter 04.07. of motor heat and iron losses is estimated. Depending on the
Direct torque (1): type of machine ventilation given by parameter 05.50 and the
Direct torque control. The motor torque is set to the value of value of the thermal time constant 04.15, an estimate of the
04.08 (04.08 + 04.09 if 04.10 is set to (1)). 04.19.
The motor speed value therefore depends on the resistive
torque of the application. 04.16 : Not used
Controlled torque (2):
Torque control with overspeed protection provided by
parameter 01.06. 04.17 : Magnetising current
Reserved (3) (4) Range: ± 2.22 x 11.32 (A)
• In torque control mode (04.11 = 1), if the resistive Magnetising current reading.
torque goes to zero, the drive accelerates the
machine to the maximum speed given by the
04.18 : Overriding current limit
minimum value between 1.3 x 01.06 and 01.06 +1000
rpm. It is therefore imperative to ensure that parameter
01.06, which limits the maximum speed, is set so as to
Format: 16 bits
ensure the safety of equipment and personnel.
Indication of the transient limit of the drive current. This value
depends on 04.05, 04.06, 04.51 and internal limits.
04.12 : Current demand filter ( )
Range: 0 to 10
Factory setting: 2 04.19 : Motor thermal state
reducing any noise generated by the speed loop, such that: Format: 16 bits
time constant = 204.12 ms. This parameter indicates the estimated thermal state of
NOTE
parameters and parameter 04.15. An alarm appears on the
04.12 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology
local display when 04.19 10.17). 04.19 is
selection.
reset to 0 on each power-up.
04.13 : Current loop proportional gain NOTE
Range: 1 to 999 The use of a PTC sensor is therefore strongly recommended
to protect the motor.
Format: 16 bits
The proportional gain is the most critical parameter in
controlling the performance of the current controllers. 04.20 : Percentage load
Increasing 04.13 increases the bandwidth of the current
control loop. A too high bandwidth induces a whistling in the Range: ± 11.32
motor and increases the risk of overcurrent. A bandwidth that Format: 16 bits
is too low leads to poor performance, especially in sensorless This parameter indicates the drive load level. A positive value
control of PM or PMASR motors indicates operation in motor mode whereas a negative value
indicates operation in generator mode (driving load).
- For Induction motor, the factory setting is adapted to the
The maximum value of 04.20 04.24.
most standard situations.
- For PM or PMASR motors, the value of 04.13 will
automatically be set after performing a stationary autotune
(see 05.12).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
04.21 : Drive Ixt level
Format: 16 bits
Indicates the drive average load level as a percentage of its
rated current 11.3 (see relevant drive installation manual).
The alarm 10.19 is activated when 04.21
04.22 to 04.23 : Not used
04.24 : User current maximum scaling
Format: 16 bits
04.20 and
parameter 04.08.
04.25 to 04.50 : Not used
04.51 : Time between starting and permanent torque
Factory setting: 60 s
Format: 16 bits
On starting, time permitted for torque limit 04.05 before
changing to torque limit 04.07.
04.52 to 04.54 : Not used
04.55 : Current limitation mode

Range: Active current (0) or Total current (1)
Factory setting: Active current (0)
Active current (0):

The current limits as described in 04.05, 04.06, 04.07 take
effect by action on the active part of the motor current.
Total current (1):
The current limits as described in 04.05, 04.06, 04.07 take
effect by direct limiting of the overall motor current.
NOTE
selection.
04.56 to 04.59 : Not used
04.60 : Electromagnetic torque

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.6 - Menu 5: Motor control
5.6.1 - Menu 5 diagram
Slip Voltage control
compensation
Post ramp Motor 05.12 Autotune
reference frequency
+ 05.13 V to F select
Menu 2
02.01 05.01
05.14 Open loop mode selection
+
05.15 Low frequency voltage boost DC bus
voltage
Motor 2 Motor 05.05

parameter 05.02 voltage
select
11.45 Modulation
0 1
05.18 Maximum switching frequency
Motor 1 Motor 2
05.06 21.06 Motor rated frequency 05.19 High stability modulation
05.20 Quasi square output

05.07 21.07 Motor rated current M
Neutral voltage managing of
05.21 the motor
05.08 21.08 Motor rated speed
Motor 05.59 Rotation direction
speed 05.09 21.09 Motor rated voltage
05.60 Low speed switching frequency
05.10 21.10 Rated power factor
05.04
05.61 Switching frequency threshold
05.11 21.11 Number of motor poles
05.17 21.12 Stator resistance
05.23 21.13 Voltage offset 05.58 05.57

Two PWM update
05.24 21.14 Transient inductance per period Actual
switching
05.25 21.24 Stator inductance (Ls) frequency
05.33 21.30 Motor volt per 1000 rpm

Menu 6
Programmable
logic & counters
Motor 2
map enable 21.15 Absorbed
power Output
05.03 power
VxIxV3
Menu Active
04.02 current
4
05.50 Motor ventilation

05.70 PTC validation
05.51 Q axis inductance (synchronous motor)
05.71 Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current Limit
05.52 Starting current (synchronous motor)
05.92 Frequency stabilisation gain for PM motor in open loop
05.53 Flux installation time
05.93 Voltage stabilisation gain for PM motor in open loop
05.54 Base Freq./nominal Freq. ratio
05.95 Filter between drive and motor
05.62 Torque/speed optimisation for synchronous motor
05.96 Filter inductance
05.63 Optimal magnetising current
05.97 Filter capacity
05.64 Starting threshold (synchronous motor) 05.98 Filter damping resistor
05.65 Variable flux on mains voltage dip
05.99 Final voltage applied to the load

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.6.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 5 05.06 : Motor rated frequency
Key:
• Low saliency PM mode (e.g for LSRPM motor, from
Dyneo® range of Leroy-Somer):
Dedicated for ISPM (surface mounted permanent magnet This is the point at which motor operation changes from
motor) or IPM (Interior permanent magnet motor) where constant torque to constant power.
During standard operation, it is the frequency indicated on the
motor nameplate.
• PM Assisted Synchro Reluctance PMASR mode (e.g for
+
range of Leroy-Somer):
05.07 : Motor rated current
Dedicated for hybrid motor technology with high saliency ratio Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32
where the torque is mainly produced by the reluctant effect. 11.32
05.01 : Output frequency This is the value of the motor rated current indicated on the
nameplate. The main purpose of the motor rated current is to
04.19.
CAUTION:
Indicates the drive output frequency. Do not set a different value than the one plated on the
motor.
05.02 : Output voltage 05.08 : Motor rated speed

Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm
Range: 0 to 999 V
Format: 16 bits
This is the rms voltage at the drive output. This is the on-load speed of the motor indicated on the
nameplate.
NOTE
05.03 : Output power This value must take into account the slip of the induction
3 motor with respect to the synchronous speed. Under no
Range: ± 11.33 x 11.32 x 2.22 x kW
1000 circumstances must this slip be negative.
05.03 is the calculated motor active power. 05.09 : Motor rated voltage
Range: 0 to 999 V
3
05.03 = 04.01 x 05.02 x (05.10 x kW). Factory setting: 400 V
1000 Format: 16 bits
If this parameter has been assigned to an analog output Enter the rated voltage indicated on the nameplate taking
via menu 7, 10 V corresponds to the maximum power account of the normal power supply conditions.
measurable by the drive (max. drive current = 2.22 x 11.32).
Output voltage
(1): Two digits after the decimal point.
05.54 < 100% 05.54 = 100%
05.09
05.04 : Motor speed 05.54 > 100%
Range: ± 2 x 01.06 rpm
The motor speed is calculated from the output frequency 05.15*

Motor speed
05.01 according to the formula: 05.06 05.06
60 x 05.01 2
05.04 (min-1) =
number of pairs of motor poles
* If 05.14 = Linear U/F law with boost (2) or Square U/F law
(1): Two digits after the decimal point. 05.15.
05.10 : Rated power factor

05.05 : DC bus voltage Range: 0.00 to 1.00
Format: 16 bits The power factor is measured automatically during a level 2

Indicates the DC bus voltage measurement. autotune phase (see 05.12) and stored in this parameter. If
it has not been possible to carry out this autotune procedure,
φ

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
05.11 : Number of motor poles • If 11.31
None (0):
Factory setting: Automatic (0) Stationary: motor data completed (1):

The stator resistance and the voltage offset are stored in
When this parameter is at Automatic (0), the drive 05.17 and 05.23 respectively. The gain 04.13 is automatically
automatically calculates the number of poles according to the updated.
rated speed (05.08) and the rated frequency (05.06). Rotating: incomplete motor data (2):
The stator resistance and the voltage offset are stored in
with the table hereafter: 05.17 and 05.23 respectively. Inductances 05.24 and 05.25
(or 21.14 and 21.24) are also measured and stored. The
Number of poles 05.11
power factor 05.10 and the gain 04.13 are automatically
2 2 Poles (1) updated.
4 4 Poles (2)
6 Encoder offset measure/rotor parking (3):
This mode is only active if 03.38 is set to «Resolver». In this
10 mode, the motor runs at very low speed so that the resolver
12 12 Poles (6) offset can be measured. This offset is automatically stored in
14 14 Poles (7) 03.25.
16 Encoder offset measure/signal injection (4):
NOTE Stationary: incomplete motor data (5):

When the number of motor poles is higher than 16, set 05.11
to Automatic (0).
05.12 : Autotune • If 11.31

Rotating: incomplete motor data (2), None (0):
Encoder offset measure/signal injection (4),

Stationary: motor data completed (1):
The stator resistance and the voltage offset are stored
Reserved (6)
in 05.17 and 05.23 respectively. The stator inductance is
measured but not stored. An alarm is generated if its value is
very different from the value entered in 05.24. The gain 04.13
• During the autotune phase, brake control is is automatically updated.
disabled. Rotating: incomplete motor data (2):
• If 05.12 is set to 2, 3 or 4, the motor rotates at low The stator resistance and the voltage offset are stored in
speed or at 2/3 of its rated speed. Make sure that this 05.17 and 05.23 respectively. Inductances 05.24 and 05.25
operation does not present any safety risks, and that (or 21.14 and 21.24) are also measured and stored. The
the motor is stopped before the autotune procedure. power factor 05.10 and the gain 04.13 are automatically
• After modifying the motor parameters, repeat updated.
autotuning.
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking (3) :
This mode (typically for LSRPM motors) is only active if 03.38
• If 11.31 = Synchronous motor: Voltage control (0) or
sensor» or «Resolver». In this mode, the motor runs at very
Induction motor: Voltage control (1)
low speed so that the encoder offset can be measured. This
None (0): offset is automatically stored in 03.25.
Encoder offset measure/signal injection (4) :
Stationary: motor data completed (1):
The stator resistance and the voltage offset are stored in if 03.38 is set to «U, V, W only», «Incremental UVW»,
05.17 and 05.23 respectively. The gain 04.13 is automatically
updated. permanent magnet machines with high saliency ratio [Lq >
. A current signal with high frequency and low
Rotating: incomplete motor data (2): amplitude is injected into the motor stator. The encoder offset
is determined by measuring the motor stator inductance in
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking (3) :
Stationary: incomplete motor data (5):
Encoder offset measure/signal injection (4) : Reserved.
Stationary: incomplete motor data (5):

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Procedures to carry out the autotune: 05.14 : Open loop mode select ( )
Stationary: motor data completed (1): Range: Rs measured each run (0),
- Ensure that the known motor parameters have been Rs not measured (1),
Linear U/F law with boost (2),
- Enable the drive.
- If the drive is undersized in relation to the motor power, Rs measured after each power up (4),
reduce the current limit 04.07 in order to avoid causing the
drive to trip. Factory setting: Rs measured after each power up (4)
freewheel stop when autotuning is complete. Determines the Voltage control mode. The «Rs measured
- Wait until the procedure ends. 05.12 each run (0)», «Rs not measured (1)», «Rs measured after
- Disable the drive and remove the run command.
The motor is then ready to operate normally.
Rotating: incomplete motor data (2): motors. These 4 modes are distinguished by the method
used to identify the motor parameters, in particular the stator
In this mode, the motor runs at 2/3 of its rated resistance. As these parameters vary with temperature and
speed or at 1000 rpm maximum. are essential for obtaining optimum performance, the machine
cycle must be taken into account for selecting the most
Ensure that the known motor parameters have been appropriate mode. The «Linear U/F law with boost(2)» and
- If the drive is undersized in relation to the motor power, by U/F ratio modes for induction motors.
reduce the current limit 04.07 in order to avoid causing the
drive to trip Rs measured each run (0):
- Enable the drive. The stator resistance 05.17 and voltage offset 05.23 are
- Give a run command. The motor is driven, then performs a measured each time the drive receives a run command.
freewheel stop when autotuning is complete. These measurements are valid only if the machine is stopped,
- Wait until the procedure ends. 05.12
- Disable the drive and remove the run command. run command is given less than 2 seconds after the previous
The motor is then ready to operate normally.
Encoder offset measure/rotor parking (3): seconds required between a stop command and a new run
- command.
- Enable the drive. Rs not measured (1):
- Give a run command. The motor runs at very low speed The stator resistance 05.17 and voltage offset 05.23 are not
until the encoder offset can be measured. measured.
This mode is less effective than mode 0 but is compatible with
Encoder offset measure/signal injection (4): all operating cycles. During commissioning, autotune when
- stopped should be carried out (05.12) so as to automatically
and that the motor is stopped. 05.17 and 05.23 values.
- Enable the drive.
- Give a run command. The motor shaft moves slightly during Linear U/F law with boost (2):
the measuring phase.
parameters 05.15 and 05.09.
NOTE NOTE
- If a stop command is given before the end of the auto-tune Use this mode to control several motors connected in parallel.
phase, an «Autotune» trip is generated.
- An auto-tune test cannot be initiated if the drive is tripped or Motor voltage
the drive inverter is active. 05.09
- After modifying motor parameters, repeat auto-tuning.
- When 05.12
05.09/2
05.13 : Flux optimization select Boost

Range: Linear (0) or Dynamic (1) 05.15
Factory setting: Linear (0) 05.06/2 05.06 Motor
frequency
Linear (0): Rs measured after each factory setting (3):

05.06). After a return to factory settings, the stator resistance 05.17
Dynamic (1): and voltage offset 05.23
Dynamic U/F ratio. is enabled (drive output active).
Generates a voltage/frequency characteristic which varies
with the load. It is for use in quadratic torque applications
(pumps/fans/compressors). It can be used in constant torque
applications with low dynamics to reduce motor noise.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Rs measured after each power up (4): 05.18 : Switching frequency
The stator resistance 05.17 and voltage offset 05.23 are
POWERDRIVE MD2
each power-up.
• A voltage is briefly applied to the motor. For

Sets the PWM switching frequency.
safety reasons, live parts must NOT be
accessible once the drive is powered up. 05.18 Frequency 05.18 Frequency
0 10
Square U/F law with boost (5): 1 11
Square law characteristic. 2 12
Motor voltage
05.09
4 14
6 16
7 17
Boost 9 19
05.15
05.06 Motor frequency
NOTE
-
05.15 : Low frequency voltage boost LEROY-SOMER.
05.09) -
Format: 16 bits allowed setting).

If 11.31 is set to «Induction motor in Voltage control mode» (1)
and 05.14 to «Linear U/F law with boost (2)» or «Square U/F CAUTION:
05.15 A high switching frequency reduces the magnetic noise,
motor at low speed so that it delivers more torque on starting. on the other hand it increases the drive losses. Refer to
It is a percentage of the motor rated voltage (05.09). the installation manual to determine the drive derating
Motor voltage according to the frequency.
05.09
05.19 : Modulation pattern
05.09/2 Factory setting: Auto (2)
Boost SPWM (0):

05.15 Space vector PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).
05.06/2 05.06 Motor
frequency DPWM1 (1):
Discontinuous PWM optimized to minimize the drive losses
when motor power factor exceeds 0.9.
05.16 : Not used
Auto (2):
The controller selects the most adapted pattern according to
05.17 : Stator resistance
the operating point.
DPWM (3):
Discontinuous PWM optimized to minimize the drive losses
During autotuning (05.12 = Stationary: motor data completed when motor power factor lower than 0.9.
(1) or Rotating: incomplete motor data (2)), the value of Reserved (4)
the stator resistance is stored automatically in 05.17 (see
CAUTION:
parameter 05.14).
Enabling DPWM or DPWM1 can lead to additional losses
If the stator resistance cannot be measured (motor not
in the motor. These two modes are not active when 11.31
connected, value higher than the maximum rating) a «Stator
= 0 or 3 and 05.37 = 0 and 05.95 = 0. Instead SPWM is
resistance» trip occurs.
used.
05.20 : Quasi square output

Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Factory setting: Enabled (1)
Disabled (0):
Function disabled.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Enabled (1): PMASR motors. Its value should be entered from the
Allows the maximum value of the drive output voltage to be nameplate data, or else using the autotune procedure (see
05.12).
output voltage is no longer perfectly sinusoidal but contains

05.25 : Stator inductance (Ls)
05.21 : Management of the motor neutral voltage

- Induction motor: Sum of the magnetising inductance and
of 05.25 is stored automatically during an autotune when

With Hv3 (0): rotating (05.12 = Rotating: incomplete motor data (2)).
This setting is used to obtain maximum rms voltage at the - Synchronous motor: The value of 05.25 is stored
drive output. This setting should be adopted when the load automatically during an autotune when rotating (05.12 =
neutral point is not used (as with motors). Rotating: incomplete motor data (2)).
Without Hv3 (1):
The maximum rms voltage level at the drive output is reduced 05.26 : Dynamic control enable
neutral point.
Randomize (2): No (0):
Reserved.
Yes (1):
05.22 : Voltage synchronization 11.30 = 2, 4 or 6), a feed-forward
the motor speed is used to improve the performance of the

current controllers.
This parameter is dedicated for synchronization of the output NOTE
voltages of two or more inverters set in U/F law (05.14 = 2) 05.26 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology
with a shared position coming from an absolute encoder. On selection.
starting command, the voltage is ramped according to half the
value of parameter 05.53.
05.27 to 05.30 : Not used
No (0):
05.31 : Defluxing loop gain
03.26 (1):
The position given by the encoder selected by 03.26 is used Factory setting: 1000
to generate a synchronized output voltage. Format: 16 bits
When 05.22 This parameter controls the gain of the drive output voltage
the output voltage will decrease down to a minimum value limiting loop. It only acts when the motor is operating above
settable by 05.15
Reserved (2) NOTE
selection.
05.23 : Voltage offset
05.31
Factory setting: 0.0 V mode» (11.31
Format: 16 bits control» (11.31 11.31 =
This voltage offset is measured by the drive (see parameter 18.28 = 1).
05.14). It is used to correct imperfections in the drive,
especially voltage drops in the IGBTs and idle times. This 05.32 : Motor torque per amp (Kt) ( )
parameter has an important role in low-speed operation, i.e. Reserved.
when the drive output voltage is low.
During autotuning (05.12 = Stationary (1) or Rotating (2)), the 05.33 : Motor volt per 1000 rpm (Ke) ( )
value of the voltage offset is stored automatically in 05.23.
05.24 : d-axis inductance / leakage ind Format: 16 bits

The value of 05.33 is used for synchronous motors. Its value
should be entered preferably from the nameplate data or else
using the autotune procedure.
- Induction motor: Value of the overall leakage inductance NOTE
applied to the typical machine stator. The value of 05.24 is If 05.04 05.33
stored automatically during an autotune when rotating in represents the Motor volt per 10000 rpm.
05.12).
- Synchronous motor: Value of the typical machine cyclical 05.34 and 05.35 : Not used
stator inductance. The value of 05.24 is used for PM or

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
05.36 : Low speed sensorless mode for PM motors 05.38 to 05.49 : Not used
Factory setting: Current vector (1) 05.50 : Motor ventilation
CAUTION: Factory setting: Self cooled (1)

05.36 is only active if 03.38 = «Soft. 1 / Back EMF
orientation», «Soft. 3 / adaptive model», «Soft. 4 / flux
oriented» or «Soft. 5». Not cooled (0):
The motor has neither an internal fan nor a forced ventilation
NOTE unit.
selection. Self cooled (1):
The motor has a fan on the shaft.
Signal injection (0):
At low speed, a current signal with high frequency and low Forced cooling (2):
amplitude is injected into the motor stator. The information The motor has a forced ventilation unit.
NOTE
speed. This method can only be used on machines with high The value of parameter 05.50 combined with the values
of parameters 04.15 (Motor thermal time constant), 05.07
Current vector (1): (Motor rated current), 05.08 (Motor rated speed ) and 11.31
On the run command, the motor is «parked» in a known (User drive mode) is used to estimate the machine thermal
position. The «parking» current and time are set by use percentage indicated in 04.19
parameters 05.52 and 05.53 respectively. After the «parking»
phase, the drive applies a current rotating vector whose 05.51 : Q axis inductance (synchronous motor)
acceleration ramp depends on parameter 02.11. When 05.24
the machine speed reaches the value set in 05.64, control
03.38. Format: 16 bits
Used to set an inductance value in quadrature with the pole
Post ramp reference axis for synchronous motors with saliency.
Speed 02.01
05.52 : Starting current (synchronous motor)

Starting
threshold Speed feedback
05.07
05.64
t (s) Format: 16 bits
05.53
Flux establishment time With a synchronous motor (11.30
(LSRPM) (4)), this parameter is used to improve starting
05.52 Starting
threshold Motor current for permanent magnet motors controlled without a position
x 05.07 Motor sensor.
rated current
With an asynchronous motor (11.30 = Induction motor:
t (s)
installation.
None (2)
NOTE
05.37 : Synchronous motor technology 05.52 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology
Range: Low saliency PM (LSRPM) (0), selection.
05.53 : Flux establishment time

Factory setting: Low saliency PM (LSRPM) (0)
NOTE Format: 16 bits

05.37 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology With a synchronous motor (11.30
selection.
«parking» time before motor rotation. With an asynchronous
Low saliency PM (LSRPM) (0):
Dedicated for PM motors where torque is mainly produced by
installed if 05.53
05.24
obtained.
and 05.51 are taken into account for the motor control.
PM assisted Synchro Reluctance (LSHRM) (1):
Dedicated for PM motors with high saliency ratio where
the torque is mainly produced by the reluctant effect. See
parameters 05.72 to 05.88.
Synchronous reluctance (2):
Reserved.
Wound rotor (3):
Reserved.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
05.54 : Base Freq./nominal Freq. ratio
05.57 : Actual switching frequency
Format: 16 bits
induction motor. Displays the switching frequency actually used. Related

05.54 on the parameters: 05.18, 05.60 and 18.27.
change in the motor no-load voltage characteristic as a
function of the speed of rotation. 05.58 : Two PWM update per period
Motor voltage 05.54 < 100% 05.54 = 100% Factory setting: Yes (1)
05.09
05.54 > 100% No (0):
The frequency for calculating the motor control is the same as
that displayed by 05.57.
Yes (1):
Motor The frequency for calculating the motor control is double
05.06 speed
that displayed by 05.57. This option allows more precise
motor control. It is not available when the user has chosen a
switching frequency 05.18 .
05.55 : Motor overcurrent threshold
05.59 : Rotation direction
Range: Clockwise (0) or C/clockwise (1)
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: Clockwise (0)
Synchronous motors:
05.07 This parameter is used to modify the direction of rotation
the «Motor overcurrent» trip. In case of overcurrent, if the when viewed from the drive end, without changing the speed
11.32, the drive will more likely reference sign.
It is only taken into account when the drive is stopped.
Active only if 11.31 05.60 : Low-speed switching frequency
Induction motors:
CAUTION:
Do not increase this parameter value without notification 05.60 Frequency 05.60 Frequency
of motor manufacturer.
0 10
NOTE 1 11
05.55 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology 2 12
selection.
4 14
05.56 : Fast motor current monitoring
Factory setting : Yes (1) 6 16

7 17
No (0):
A comparison between the motor current and the threshold 9 19
05.55 is made one time per switching frequency.
If the motor current exceeds the threshold, a “Motor NOTE
Yes (1): Leroy-Somer.

A fast monitoring of the motor current (multiple times Used to set the switching frequency when the motor
per switching period) is performed by the drive. Then, a 05.61.
comparison between this fast motor current measurement
05.55 is made. If the motor 05.61 : Switching frequency threshold
generated.
NOTE
If the motor frequency (speed) is below the threshold set by
05.61, the switching frequency selected via 05.60 is used.
selection.
Otherwise, the switching frequency 05.18 is used.
the number of pairs of poles and n the speed in rpm.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
05.62 : Torque/speed optimisation for synchronous 05.65 : Variable flux on mains voltage dip
motor
Range: Standard (0), Fixed (1), Optimized mode 1 (2),
Factory setting: Standard (0) Management of the voltage-frequency ratio according to

NOTE
Mains voltage > 05.09
V
selection. Mains V
This parameter is only active when 11.30 is set to 4 or 6 05.09
05.54 < 100%
05.54 = 100%
Standard (0):
The drive regulates a zero magnetising current in the motor 05.54 > 100%
(corresponds to the majority of applications).
Fixed (1):
The drive imposes in line with the pole axis a current set by min-1
05.54 x 05.06 05.06
05.63 (visible in 04.17).
Mains voltage < 05.09 and 05.65 = 0
Optimized mode 1 (2):
- If Synchronous motor technology 11.30 V
Ctrl. (LSRPM) (4) (low saliency PM) is selected, the drive 05.09
Mains V
imposes in line with the pole axis a current proportional to 05.54 < 100%
05.54 = 100%
the active current. The proportionality slope is set by 05.63
which corresponds to the demagnetising current desired at
the motor rated current 05.07. 05.54 > 100%
- If Synchronous motor technology 11.30 = PMASR: oriented
(PM assisted synchro reluctance) is
selected, the drive manages the d axis current according to min-1
05.06
the values of 05.86 and 05.87. 05.54 x 05.06
Optimized mode 2 (3):

Mains voltage < 05.09 and 05.65 = 1
according to the typical motor parameters (05.24, 05.33,
V
05.51, 05.72 and 05.78). 05.09
Mains V
Reserved (4) 05.54 < 100%
05.54 = 100%
range), the pole axis current is imposed by automatic 05.54 > 100%
05.63 : Optimal magnetizing current min-1

05.54 x 05.06 05.06
Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32
Factory setting: 0.00 A
05.66 to 05.69 : Not used

CAUTION:
This parameter is only active when 11.31 = 3.
05.70 : Motor thermal protection management
When 05.62 equals to 1 or 2, 05.63 is used to set the Range: Disabled (0), Control board terminal (1),
optimum magnetising current for synchronous motors (see MDX Encoder terminal (2),
explanations in parameter 05.62).
When 05.62 is on Standard (0), the value programmed Factory setting: Disabled (0)
in 05.63 can be used to brake the motor more quickly by
increasing the losses in the motor during braking phases. To
NOTE
do this, set 02.04
selection.
05.64 : Starting threshold (synchronous motor)
05.08 Disabled (0):
PTC temperature sensors not managed by the drive.
Control board terminal (1):
Used to set the speed at which the injection of a current to Fault management of a motor temperature sensor connected
help with starting a permanent magnet synchronous motor is to DI1/CTP input of the main control board.
cancelled (see 05.52).
NOTE
05.64 can be preset by 11.30 depending of motor technology MDX Encoder terminal (2):
selection. Fault management of a motor temperature sensor connected

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Control board & MDX encoder terminals (3): 05.80 : Inductances correction factor
Fault management of 2 motor temperature sensors
respectively connected to DI1/CTP input of the main control
option. Allows adjusting in percentage the theoretical value of

CAUTION: inductances 05.72 and 05.78. The factory setting is suitable
If Pr 05.70 is set to 1 or 3, then digital input DI1 must not for most situations.
be used (do not assign 08.21).
05.81 : Estimated q-axis inductance
NOTE
Estimated value of Lq including the effects of Id and Iq.

05.71 : Low Speed Sensorless Mode Current Limit
05.82 to 05.85 : Not used

Format: 16 bits
NOTE 05.86 : Partial load phase offset
Range: 0 to 90°
selection.
(05.36 = 0).
of the motor current and the direction of the no-load motor
voltage which produces the maximum torque when the motor
05.72 : q-axis inductance @ no load current is equal to half DBC (05.76/2) . This value is indicated
on the motor nameplate.
Format: 16 bits
05.87 : Phase offset @ DBC
Range: 0 to 90°
current (04.01
DBC (05.76).
05.73 and 05.74 : Not used of the motor current and the direction of the no-load motor
voltage which produces the maximum torque when the motor
05.75 : Iq Test Current For Inductance Measurement current is equal to design base current DBC (05.76).
Reserved.
Θ (°)
05.76 : Design Base Current (DBC)

05.88
Range: ± 2.22 x 11.32 (A)
Factory setting: 0.01 A 05.86
value 05.78 and Phase Offset 05.87 are characterized. 04.01
DBC/2 DBC
05.77 : Phase Offset at Iq Test Current
Reserved.
05.88 : Torque angle tuning
05.78 : q-axis inductance @ DBC Range: ± 10.0°
Factory setting: -1.0°
05.87 05.87 + 05.88.

the motor current (04.01) is equal to the Design Base Current
(05.76) and the phase offset equals to 05.87. 05.89 : Not used
05.79 : Not used 05.90 : Inverted saturation characteristic
Used to declare that the motor has an inverted saturation

characteristic.
NOTE
selection.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
05.91 : Not used
05.92 : Frequency stabilisation gain for PM motor in

open loop
Range: 0 to 1000
Factory setting: 0
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to control a PM motor in voltage
control (11.31 = 0). Function disabled if set to 0.
05.93 : Voltage stabilisation gain for PM motor in

open loop
Range: 0 to 1000
Factory setting: 0
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to control a PM motor in voltage
control (11.31 = 0). Function disabled if set to 0.
05.94 : Not used
05.95 : Filter between drive and motor
and motor.
05.96 : Filter inductance
inductance when 05.95

- To control a PM motor in voltage control (11.31 = 0) supplied
should then integrate the total inductance between drive and

motor.
05.97 : Filter capacity
capacity when 05.95 = “Yes “.
05.98 : Filter damping resistor
damping resistor when 05.95 = “Yes “.
05.99 : Final voltage applied to the load
Range : 0 to 999 V
Format : 16 bits
Indicates the estimated voltage at the motor terminals taking
account of the voltage drops modelled by parameters 05.96
to 05.98.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.7 - Menu 6: Programmable logic and counters
• Management of logic commands
Control via terminal
Run no latch
Start stop Control via
+24V logic select keypad
DI4
06.30
FWD/Stop 06.04 PWR
MENU 8
DI5
06.32
REV/Stop
Run Latched
+24V
DI4 06.32
FWD
MENU 8
DI5 06.39
Stop
Control
word
0
Run Fwd/Rev 1 06.42
+24V
DI4 06.34
Run/Stop MENU 8 2
FWD/Reverse DI5 06.33
3
Controlled run
+24V Run/Stop 1 2
no latch
DI4 source 0 3
FWD/Stop MENU 8 06.30
06.43
DI5
REV/Stop 06.32
MANAGEMENT OF LOGIC
COMMANDS
06.01 Stop mode 06.10 Reduced voltage 06.62 Delay before mains loss
06.03 Mains loss mode 06.12 Keypad stop key 06.63 Delay before flying restart
06.06 DC injection braking level 06.15 External Enable N°1

06.44 Permission to stop cooling
06.07 DC injection braking time 06.16 External Enable N°2 fans
06.08 Hold zero speed 06.60 Mains undervoltage threshold
06.09 Catch a spinning motor 06.61 Delay before start
• Timer, energy meter

Run/Stop command
01.11
Clock Run time
0
h, min years, days
1
06.23 06.22 Reset
energy
Energy meter meter
kW.h MW.h 06.17
0
X 06.25 06.24
Output
power 1
Powered up time
Menu 5 years, days h, min
05.03
06.20 06.21

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.7.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 6 Ramp + DC (2) ( ):
Stop on deceleration ramp with DC injection for an imposed
period of time.
06.01 : Stop mode The drive decelerates the motor according to the deceleration
Range: Coast (0), Ramp (1), Ramp + DC (2), mode chosen in parameter 02.04.
When zero frequency is reached, the drive injects DC with
Factory setting: Ramp (1) a magnitude which can be set in parameter 06.06 for a time
06.07.
Coast (0): The drive is «ready».
The drive stops in freewheel mode.
Motor
The power bridge is deactivated as soon as the stop speed
command is given.
The drive cannot receive another run command during the
time programmed in 06.63, the motor demagnetisation time.
After this stopping time, the drive is «ready». The machine
stopping time depends on its inertia.
Motor
t
speed Stop
Deceleration Time
rate
Motor
current
06.06
t DC
Stop
Freewheel stop time Time injection
Motor current 06.07
Ramp (1):
Stop on deceleration ramp. Zero speed DC (3) ( ):
The drive decelerates the motor according to the deceleration Stop by braking using low frequency current injection, then
mode chosen in parameter 02.04. DC injection at zero speed.
One second after the stop, the drive is «ready». The drive decelerates the motor by imposing a low frequency
Motor
current until it reaches almost zero speed, which the drive
speed detects automatically.
The drive then injects DC with a magnitude which can be set
in parameter 06.06 06.07.
«ready».
Motor speed
t
Stop
Deceleration Time
1 sec
rate
t
Stop
Time
Braked stop
Motor current
06.07
06.06
Motor Low frequency DC

current current injection injection

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Timed DC (4) ( ): conditions return, deceleration continues until the motor
Stop on DC injection with an imposed period of time. stops, according to the stop mode programmed in 06.01.
The drive decelerates the motor by imposing a current The drive trips on «Mains loss».
06.06 Delayed stop (2):
06.07 If there is a Mains trip (see 06.60) or a mains supply break,
drive is «ready». the drive will decelerate on a ramp, which is automatically
. calculated by the drive, so that the motor feeds back the
Motor energy to the DC bus.
speed When normal conditions return:
- If the duration of the mains loss is less than parameter 06.62
«Delay before mains loss», the motor reaccelerates up to the
reference speed.
- If the duration of the mains loss is greater than parameter
06.62 «Delay before mains loss», deceleration continues in
freewheel mode. The drive trips on «Mains loss».
t
Stop
Time
Braked stop DC bus Mains DC bus Mains
voltage supply break voltage supply break
Motor
current
06.06
Motor Motor speed

DC injection speed
Motor
06.07
current
NOTE
Delay before Delay before
), the Ramp + DC (2), Zero mains loss mains loss
(06.62) (06.62)
the Ramp (1) stop mode.
06.02 : Not used NOTE

See also parameter 18.70.
06.03 : Mains loss mode
06.04 : Start stop logic select
Range: Run no latch (0), Run latched (1), Run Fwd/Rev (2),
No detection (0):
The drive does not take account of mains supply breaks and
Used to choose one of 4 Run/Stop command and rotation
bus. direction management modes.
NOTE
Mains loss Open STO-1 and STO-2 terminals before modifying 06.04.
DC bus
voltage Drive output Run no latch (0):
bridge interlock
Command for FWD/Stop and REV/Stop via non-latching
Bus undervoltage
contacts. In its factory setting:
threshold - Terminal DI4 preset to FWD/Stop.
FWD/Stop 7 DI4
CAUTION: REV/Stop 8 DI5
The «Full stop (1)» and «Delayed stop (2)» cases can only
9 +24V ref
work correctly if the energy stored in the application is
to shielding
more than the energy to be provided during the mains loss. clamps (control)
Eligible applications: ventilation, centrifuging, etc.
Full stop (1): On power-up or after a trip reset, if a Run command is already
If there is a mains supply break, the drive will decelerate on a selected, the motor starts as soon as the speed reference
ramp, which is automatically calculated by the drive, so that appears.
the motor feeds back the energy to the DC bus. When normal

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Run latched (1): 06.07 : Injection braking time
Command for Run and Stop via latching contacts.
Format: 16 bits
- 08.25 = 06.39
- 08.22 = 06.32 (DI2 assignment if necessary) 06.01
In its factory setting: (4).
- Terminal DI4 preset to FWD.
to shielding
clamps (control)
06.08 : Hold zero speed
FWD 7 DI4
Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Stop 8 DI5
9 +24V ref Disabled (0):
The drive output is deactivated at zero speed.
To change from FWD to REV or vice versa, go via a stop Enabled (1):
command. The drive output remains active while the speed is zero in
order to hold the torque at standstill. The drive output is
Run Fwd/Rev (2):
deactivated when 06.08 changes to 0.
Command for Run/Stop via non-latching contact.
NOTE
direction of rotation. When the drive is in the «Enabled» state and the Run
command has not been activated after one minute, the drive
- 08.24 = 06.34 (DI4 assignment) returns to the «Disabled» state (drive output deactivated).
- 08.25 = 06.33 DC in RUN (2):
The motor speed is zero. When there is a Run command, the
to shielding drive output is activated to maintain a permanent DC current
clamps (control)
06.06.
Run/Stop 7 DI4
DC in STOP (3):
Change of 8 DI5 On a stop command, the drive output remains activated after
direction
9 +24V ref the motor has stopped, in order to maintain a permanent
parameter 06.06.
Controlled run (no latch) (3):
Command for FWD/Stop and REV/Stop via non-latching 06.09 : Catch a spinning motor
contacts. Range: Disabled (0), Enabled (1),
In its factory setting: Forced Motor stop before restart (2)
- Terminal DI4 preset to FWD/Stop. Factory setting: Disabled (0)
• If the load is stationary at the time of the run

FWD/Stop 7 DI4 command or when the mains supply returns, this
REV/Stop 8 DI5 operation may cause the machine to rotate in
both directions before the motor accelerates. Before
9 +24V ref
enabling this function, check that there is no danger to
to shielding
clamps (control)
equipment and personnel.
Disabled (0):
to shielding
The drive does not execute a «catch a spinning motor»
On power-up
clamps (control) or after a trip reset, if a run command is already
procedure of a coasting motor.
7 must
DI4 be cycled for the command to take effect. Enabled (1):
If the drive output is inactive, the drive executes a procedure
8 DI5
06.05 : Not used to calculate the motor frequency and direction of rotation.
After the output bridge is reactivated, it will automatically
9 +24V ref initiate the output frequency to the measured value and
06.06 : Injection braking level
05.07) reaccelerate the motor up to the reference frequency. See
03.91.
Format: 16 bits In some cases, it may be necessary to increase the time
delay before the catch a spinning motor procedure (required
injection braking (see 06.01 and 06.08). for motor demagnetisation). For details, see 06.63.
CAUTION: Forced Motor stop before restart (2):
For efficient braking, the value of parameter 06.06 should This mode can be used to stop a coasting motor before
be 60% minimum. starting it again.
The values 04.05, 04.06 and 04.07 can limit the braking
level defined in 06.06.
to shielding
86 clamps (control) Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2
4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Stop 7 DI4
- For induction motors (11.31 = 1 or 2): a DC current is 06.17 : Reset energy meter
injected in the motor. The level and the duration of the DC Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
current injection are respectively set by 06.06 and 06.07. Factory setting: Disabled (0)
- For synchronous motors (11.31
motor, the drive adds losses in the stator by controlling the When this parameter is set to Enabled (1), the meters 06.24
motor current amplitude. The level and the duration of the and 06.25 are reset to 0, then 06.17 reverts to Disabled (0).
motor current are respectively set by 06.06 and 06.07.
06.18 and 06.19 : Not used
NOTE
Catch a coasting motor is not compatible with the S ramp
(02.06) associated with brake control (12.41 06.20 : Powered-up time: years, days
06.10 : Reduced voltage

Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Format: 16 bits
Factory setting: Disabled (0) This parameter records for how many years and days the
drive has been powered up.
Disabled (0):
The DC bus undervoltage detection thresholds are those
06.21 : Powered-up time: hours, minutes
Enabled (1):
Lowers the DC bus undervoltage detection threshold to that Format: 16 bits
of the drive with the next lowest rated voltage. This enables a This parameter records for how many hours and minutes the
drive has been powered up.
400 V, as necessary. 06.21 returns to 0 and 06.20 is incremented by
one day.
CAUTION:
The value of 06.10 is taken into account only after the
drive is powered back up. 06.22 : Run time: years, days
If 06.10 = «Enabled», the mains undervoltage threshold

06.60 must be set accordingly. Format: 16 bits
This parameter records the number of years and days of
06.11 : Not used
06.12 : Keypad stop key

06.23 : Run time: hours, minutes
Format: 16 bits
When the source of commands is not via the keypad (06.43
This parameter records the number of hours and minutes of
06.12 is used to disable the «Stop» function of the
parameter-setting interface.
06.23 returns to 0 and 06.22 is incremented by
The RESET function is not affected by this parameter when
one day.
the keypad is being used.
06.13 and 06.14 : Not used

06.24 : Energy meter: MW.h
06.15 : External Enable N°1 Range: 0.0 to 999.9 MW.h
06.16 : External Enable N°2 Format: 16 bits
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This meter counts the energy part in MW.h which circulates
Factory setting: Enabled (1) from the DC to the AC side of an inverter. For an inverter
located to the motor side, the value represents the energy
If the drive is enabled via the terminals, the user can then consumed by the motor. For an inverter located to the grid
disable or enable the drive via 06.15 and 06.16. side, the value represents the energy returned to the grid.
CAUTION: This meter can be reset to 0 by changing parameter 06.17 to
Disabling via the drive terminals STO-1 and STO-2
overrides 06.15.
06.25 : Energy meter: kW.h

06.15
& Inverter enable
Range: 0.0 to 99.99 kW.h
Format: 16 bits
06.16
Same as 06.24 for the energy part in kW.h.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Control
06.26 : Regenerated energy meter: MW.h Decimal Equivalent
word bits Functions
conversion parameter
06.42
Range: 0.0 to 999.9 MW.h
Format: 16 bits Analog ref./
This meter counts the energy part in MW.h which circulates 01.42
Preset ref.
from the AC to the DC side of an inverter. For an inverter 9 Reserved
located to the motor side, the value represents the energy 10 1024 Reserved
returned to the DC bus (For POWERDRIVE MD2R,
11 Reserved
this energy is returned to the Grid; for other Powerdrive
12 4096 Reserved
architecture, this energy is dissipated in the braking resistor).
Drive reset 10.33
For an inverter located to the grid side, the value represents
the energy absorbed to the Grid. 14 Reserved
This meter can be reset to 0 by changing parameter 06.17 to If the Manual/Auto bit is at 1 and 06.43 = 1, then the drive is
controlled by bits 0 to 6 of control word 06.42.
If the Manual/Auto bit is at 0 or 06.43
controlled by parameters 06.15, 06.30, 06.31, 06.32, 06.33,
06.27 : Regenerated energy meter: kW.h 06.34, 06.39.
Range: 0.0 to 99.99 kW.h CAUTION:
Format: 16 bits For the control word to be taken into account, parameter
Same as 06.26 for the energy part in kW.h. 06.43 must be at 1.
06.42 should correspond to the binary sum of the
06.28 and 06.29 : Not used commands to be given to the drive.
NOTE
06.30 to 06.34 and 06.39 : Sequencing bits
To enable the drive by validating 06.15 (bit 0), the enabling
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) terminal of the terminal block must previously have been
Factory setting: Disabled (0) activated (see explanation of 06.15).
The drive’s logic command manager (06.04) uses these bits 06.43 : Run/Stop source
as inputs rather than referring directly to the terminals. This
according to the needs of each application. Although these Factory setting: Terminals (0)
are read/write type parameters, they are volatile and are not
stored when the drive is powered down. Each time the drive is
powered up they will be reset to Disabled (0). Terminals (0):
06.30: Run forward Commands come from the control terminal block.
06.31: Jog Fieldbus (1):
06.32: Run reverse Commands are given by the control word 06.42.
06.33: Forward/Reverse Not active (2):
06.34: Run/Stop
06.39: Stop
LCD keypad (3):
Commands come from the connected parameter-setting
06.35 to 06.41 : Not used interface (MDX-Powerscreen or MDX-KEYPAD).
06.42 : Control word NOTE

Open STO1 and STO2 terminals before modifying 06.43.
Factory setting: 0
Format: 16 bits • When Pr 06.43 changes, control word Pr 06.42 is
The control word is used to control the drive via a serial link or not reset. When Pr 06.43 is set to 1 again, the
drive can restart if the control word allows this.
Control
Decimal Equivalent
word bits Functions
conversion parameter
06.42 06.44 : Permission to stop cooling fans
0 1 External Enable 06.15
1 2 Run forward 06.30
2 4 Jog 06.31 No (0):
Run reverse 06.32 10.02 «Drive active» is on «Yes (1)» or one of the inverter
4 16 Forward/Reverse 06.33 module temperatures (07.51 to 07.53
Run/Stop 06.34 Yes (1):
6 64 Reserved
7 Manual/Auto 10.02

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
06.45 to 06.59 : Not used
06.60 : Mains undervoltage threshold

Range: 100 to 600 V
Format: 16 bits
06.61 : Delay before start

Format: 16 bits
This function is used to delay the motor start-up following the
run command.
06.62 : Delay before mains loss
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to set a mains loss time during which
the drive will re-accelerate or decelerate until the motor stops
when 06.03 = Delayed stop (2) (see explanation of 06.03).
06.63 : Delay before flying restart

Range: 0.00 to 200.00 s
Format: 16 bits
(see 06.09
If the catch a spinning motor procedure does not take place
correctly, increase the value of 06.63.
stop command and the recognition of a new run command.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.8 - Menu 7: Analog inputs/outputs
• Analog I/O
Fast Analog
Fast AI1 input 1
scaling
A-D 07.77 07.76
12 bits
Analog input
1 mode Scaling Analog input 1 destination
Analog input
1 filter 07.06 07.10
07.71 07.08
X-1
Analog
input 1 07.58 1
0-10V 0 01.36
Differential AI1+ 0 100%
analog A-D
input 1 12 bits +/-10V 1 07.01
AI1- Analog input 1 scaling 0
1
07.08 07.09
Current Analog input
loop loss 1 invert
Analog input
2 mode Analog input 2 destination
Analog input 07.11 07.28
2 filter 07.14
07.72 0-20 mA 0 X-1
1 Analog input 2
20-0 mA Scaling 1
01.37
Differential AI2+ 4-20 mA wd 2 07.12
analog A-D 07.02
input 2 12 bits 20-4 mA wd 3
AI2- 07.59 0
4-20 mA wod 4 07.13
100%
20-4 mA wod 5 Analog input
2 invert
Fast Analog
Fast AI3 input 3
scaling
A-D 07.79 07.78
12 bits Current
loop loss Scaling
AI3 signal
mode 07.16 Analog input 3 destination
Analog input 07.15 07.29 07.18
3 filter 0-20 mA 0
07.60
07.73 20-0 mA 1 X-1 00.00
100%
Analog
4-20 mA wd 2 1
input 3 0 to 6
Analog 20-4 mA wd 3 Analog input 3 scaling
A-D 7
input 3 AI3 4-20 mA wod 4 07.03 07.16
12 bits 0
20-4 mA wod 5
07.17
0-10V 6
Analog input
+/-10V 7 3 invert
AO1 analog output 1 source

07.19 AO1 analog output mode
07.21
AO1 analog Analog
output 1 scale AO1 output
Current output 1 filter
magnitude 04.01 07.20 +/-10V 07.74
0
1 AO1
07.68 0-20 mA D-A output
14 bits AO1
2
4-20 mA
Absolute value
07.51 U phase temperature 07.54 Rectifier temperature 07.80 DC bus voltage
07.52 V phase temperature 07.55 Control board temperature 07.81 Supply voltage
07.53 W phase temperature

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.8.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 7 07.10 : Analog input 1 destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
NOTE
Factory setting: 01.36: Analog reference 1
The sampling period is 6 ms for menu 7 inputs and outputs.
Format: 16 bits
This address should contain the number of the parameter
which you wish to assign to input AI1.
07.01 : Analog input 1
Only numerical parameters can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, no assignment will
be taken into account.
Format: 16 bits
Used to read the value of the differential analog voltage input
1. This input uses an analog/digital converter with 12-bit 07.11 : Analog input 2 mode
resolution. Range: 0-20 mA (0), 20-0 mA (1),
4-20 mA with detection (2),
07.02 : Analog input 2 4-20 mA without detection (4),
Factory setting: 4-20 mA without detection (4)

Format: 16 bits
Used to read the value of the analog current input 2.
This input uses an analog/digital converter with 12-bit resolution. analog input AI2.
If a mode with detection is selected, the drive will cause a
«AI2 current loop loss» trip on detection of signal break.
07.03 : Analog input 3
07.14 : Analog input 2 destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: 01.37: Analog reference 2
Format: 16 bits
uses an analog/digital converter with 12-bit resolution. This address should contain the number of the parameter
which you wish to assign to input AI2.
07.04 and 07.05 : Not used Only numerical parameters can be assigned if the input is
07.06 : Analog input 1 mode

Range: 0-10 V (0) and ± 10 V (1) If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, no assignment will
Factory setting: 0-10 V (0) be taken into account.
07.15 : AI3 signal mode

0-10 V (0):
Range: 0-20 mA (0), 20-0 mA (1), 4-20 mA with detection (2),
Receives a voltage signal varying between 0 and +10 V.
± 10 V (1): 4-20 mA without detection (4),
Receives a voltage signal varying between -10 V and +10 V.
Factory setting: 0-10 V (6)
07.07 : Not used
07.08 and 07.12 : Analog inputs 1 and 2 scaling

If a mode with detection is selected, the drive will cause a
Format: 16 bits
These parameters are used, if necessary, to scale the analog 07.16 : Analog input 3 scaling

the max. value of the destination parameter. Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used, if necessary, to scale the analog
07.09 and 07.13 : Analog inputs 1 and 2 invert
the maximum value of the parameter which is assigned to it.
This parameter is used to invert the input signal. 07.17 : Analog input 3 invert
Disabled (0): Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Input signal not inverted.
Enabled (1): Used to invert the input signal.
Input signal inverted. Disabled (0):
Input signal not inverted.
Enabled (1):
Input signal inverted.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
07.18 : Analog input 3 destination Silicon chips (1):
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 The temperature displayed in 07.50, 07.51, 07.52, 07.53 is
Factory setting: 00.00 the estimated temperature of the semiconductors.
Format: 16 bits
This address should contain the number of the parameter
07.50 : Not used
numerical parameters can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the corresponding
input will take the value 0.
07.51 , 07.52 and 07.53 : U, V, W phase
temperature
07.19 : AO1 analog output 1 source Range: 0 to 200°C
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the source which you wish to 07.54 : Rectifier temperature
assign to analog output AO1.
Adjustment rang: 0 to 200°C
07.20 : AO1 analog output 1 scale Format: 16 bits
Range: 0.000 to 60.000
Format: 16 bits 07.55 : Control board temperature
Used to scale the analog output.
If 07.75 = «Automatic calibration» (0): When 07.20 = 1.000,
Format: 16 bits
of the Range of the parameter which has been assigned to it. If 07.55 exceeds 70°C, the drive over temperature alarm
If 07.75 = «Manual calibration» (1): 07.20 x 1000 expresses (10.18) is activated.
the calibration of the 10 V (20 mA). For example 07.20 =
analog output. 07.56 and 07.57 : Not used
07.21 : AO1 analog output 1 mode

Range: ± 10 V (0), 0-20 mA (1), 4-20 mA (2) 07.58 : Minimum value of AI1
Factory setting: 4-20 mA (2) Range: 0.00 to 1.00
Format: 16 bits
± 10 V (0): For an analog input value of 0, this parameter is used to set
± 10 V voltage output. the minimum value of the destination parameter.
Value 0 = (07.58 x destination parameter max. value) +
0-20 mA (1):
destination parameter min. value.
Example: AI1 is assigned to a parameter with an Range of 0
4-20 mA (2): 07.58
07.22 to 07.27 : Not used 07.59 : Minimum value of AI2

Range: 0.00 to 1.00
07.28 and 07.29 : Current loop loss on inputs AI2 Format: 16 bits
and AI3
Range: Active (0) or Lost (1) maximum value of the AI2 destination parameter. For a 0
value of the analog input, it is used to obtain a different value
These parameters switch to 1 when in 4-20 mA or 20-4 mA of the minimum value of the destination parameter.
current mode with or without detection of signal loss, the Value 0 = (07.59 x destination parameter max. value) +
destination parameter min. value.
Example: AI2 is assigned to a parameter with an Range of
07.30 to 07.48 : Not used 07.59
07.49 : Selection of the displayed temperature 07.59 is not used when input AI2 is used as a +/- 10 V input or
Range: Case (0) or Silicon chips (1) a digital input.
Factory setting: Case (0)
Case (0):
The temperature displayed in 07.50, 07.51, 07.52, 07.53
is the temperature measured on casings of IGBT power
modules.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
07.60 : Minimum value of AI3 07.75 : Scale management for analog output
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 Range: Automatic calibration (0) or Manual calibration (1)
Factory setting: 0.00 Factory setting: Automatic calibration (0)
Format: 16 bits
including I/O boards like MDX-I/O M2M or MDX-I/O Lite (see

input value of 0, it is used to obtain a different value from the 07.20 too).
destination parameter min value.
Value 0 = (07.60 x destination parameter max. value) +
destination parameter min. value. 07.76 : Fast analog input 1
07.60
Format: 16 bits
The measure is based on a 12-bit analog/digital converter
07.61 to 07.67 : Not used sampled at the actual switching frequency 05.57.
07.77 : Fast analog input 1 scaling factor

07.68 : AO1 output
Factory setting: 0,0 Units/V
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits This scaling factor converts the raw value read on the analog
Used to read the value of the AO1 output. input in V into a value corresponding to the measured variable
07.69 and 07.70 : Not used Amperes). This scaling factor is related to the characteristics
of the sensor used.
07.71 , 07.72 and 07.73 : Analog input filters 1,
2 and 3
07.78 : Fast analog input 3
Range: • 07.15 = 6 or 7),

• 07.15
None (0): Format: 16 bits
The measure is based on a 12-bit analog/digital converter
4 ms (1): sampled at the actual switching frequency 05.57.
8 ms (2): 07.79 : Fast analog input 3 scaling factor
16 ms (3): Factory setting: 0,0 Units/V

Format: 16 bits
This scaling factor converts the raw value read on the
32 ms (4): analog input (in V or mA depending on 07.15) into a value
07.74 : Analog output 1 filter factor is related to the characteristics of the sensor used.
07.80 : DC bus voltage

None (0):
Format: 16 bits
4 ms (1):
Value of the DC bus voltage measured by the drive.
8 ms (2):
07.81 : Supply voltage
16 ms (3):
Range: 0 to 999 V
32 ms (4): Format: 16 bits
Value of the mains voltage measured by the drive.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.9 - Menu 8: Digital I/O
• Assignment of digital I/O
DI1 input
Motor thermal destination
protection management
Digital input 08.21
05.70 1 invert
PTC input
or digital 0 08.11
input 1 DI1 state 00.00
1 0
DI1-CTP 08.01
2
R
3 1
3300
1800 Temperature
Trips
I sensor type
08.95
KTY84-130
+
0
- 0
08.96 1 1
PT1000 Sensor 08.98 Thermal sensor
temperature fault
+ Thermal 2 management
2 monitoring
- status OR 3
(drive)
Digital input
08.97 polarity
Optional Threshold (KTY or PT1000) 08.29

MDX-ENCODER 0
or MDX-RESOLVER R Negative
Control
3300 Thermal logic 1
T1
08.99 monitoring Positive
T2 1800 status
Trips I (MDX option)
DI2 input
Digital input destination
2 invert
08.22
Digital DI2 state 08.12
input 2 Preset ref.
1 selection
DI2 08.02
01.45
0
DI3 input destination

Digital input 08.23
Digital DI3 state 08.13
input 3 3 invert Ref. select using
1 digital inputs
DI3 08.03
01.41

Digital input 08.24
Digital DI4 state 4 invert 08.14
input 4
1 FWD/Stop
DI4 08.04
06.30

Digital input 08.25
Digital DI5 state 5 invert 08.15
input 5
1 REV/Stop
DI5 08.05
06.32

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Assignment of digital outputs and relay outputs
DO1 digital output source

Digital output
08.26 1 invert
08.16
Zero speed
10.03 DO1 reading
1
DO1 Digital
08.06 output 1
0
STO1
Safe Torque Trip: Inconsistency

Off inputs 08.09 between STO inputs
Output relay
STO2 1 state
Output relay
1 source & 08.07
RL1
08.27 Relay
output 1
Output relay COM-RL1
1 invert
Drive 08.17
healthy
10.01 1
Output relay
2 source
08.28 Output relay
2 invert
Vmax
alarm 08.18
Output relay
10.52 2 state
1
08.08
RL2
0 Relay
output 2
COM-RL2
08.20 Digital I/O read word
08.50 Buffer 1
08.51 Buffer 2
08.52 Buffer 3
08.53 Buffer 4

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.9.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 8 08.11 to 08.15 : Digital inputs 1 to 5 invert
NOTE
The sampling period is 2 ms for the digital inputs and outputs.
These parameters are used to invert the state of the digital input.
08.01 to 08.05 : DI1 to DI5 state Disabled (0):
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Enabled (1):

Inverted.
08.16 : Digital output 1 invert

08.06 : DO1 reading Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This parameter is used to invert the state of output DO1.
Disabled (0):
08.07 : Output relay 1 state Enabled (1):

Inverted.
Range: Open (0) or Closed (1)
08.17 : Output relay 1 invert
This parameter indicates the state of the output relay. Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Open (0):
RL1 open.
This parameter is used to invert the state of the relay 1 source.
Closed (1):
Disabled (0):
RL1 closed.
Enabled (1):
08.08 : Output relay 2 state Inverted.
Range: Open (0) or Closed (1) 08.18 : Output relay 2 invert

This parameter indicates the state of the output relay. Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Open (0):
RL2 open. This parameter is used to invert the state of relay 2 source.
Closed (1): Disabled (0):
RL2 closed.
Enabled (1):
Inverted.
08.09 : Safe Torque Off inputs
08.19 : Not used
Range: STO2 - STO1: 00 (0), STO2 - STO1: 01 (1),
08.20 : Digital I/O read word

This parameter indicates the state of the «Safe Torque Off»
inputs (at the terminal block), from STO1, STO2 terminals.
STO2 - STO1: 00 (0): Format: 16 bits
Drive disabled. This parameter is used to determine the state of the I/O with a
STO2 - STO1: 01 (1): single read operation.
Tripped. Each bit of this word represents the state of parameters 08.01
to 08.09.
STO2 - STO1: 10 (2):
Tripped. Bit 7 6 4 2 1 0
State
STO2 - STO1: 11 (3):
Drive enabled.
E.g.
DI1 = 1 = 20 = 1
08.10 : Not used 2
=4
==>08.20

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
08.21 : DI1 input destination 08.27 : Output relay 1 source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 Factory setting: 10.01 (Drive healthy)
This parameter is used to select the destination of digital input 1. This parameter is used to select the source for the output relay.
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned to Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned.
the input. If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is taken into account.
taken into account.
CAUTION: 08.28 : Output relay 2 source
If 05.70 is set to Control board terminal (1) or Control Range: 00.00 to 21.51
board & MDX encoder terminals (3), then digital input DI1 Factory setting: 10.52 (Vmax alarm)
must not be used (do not assign 08.21). Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the source for the output relay.
08.22 : DI2 input destination Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is
Factory setting: 01.45 (Reference selection) taken into account.
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the destination of digital input 2. 08.29 : Digital input polarity
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed to the input or output, Factory setting: Positive (1)
no assignment is taken into account.
This parameter is used to change the polarity of digital inputs.
08.23 : DI3 input destination Negative (0):
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 01.41 (Reference selection) Positive (1):
Format: 16 bits Positive logic.
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned. 08.30 to 08.49 : Not used
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed to the input or output,
no assignment is taken into account.
08.50 to 08.53 : Buffers 1 to 4
Range: Inactive (0) or Active (1)
08.24 : DI4 input destination Factory setting: Inactive (0)
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 06.30 (FWD/Stop) Binary parameters that can be used as buffer variables.
Format: 16 bits CAUTION:
This parameter is used to select the destination of digital input 4. At each power-up, parameters 08.50 to 08.53 revert to (0).
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned to
the input.
08.54 to 08.94 : Not used
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is
taken into account.
08.95 : Temperature sensor type
08.25 : DI5 input destination
Factory setting: PTC (0)
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 06.32 (Rev/Stop)
Selects the type of sensor used for motor thermal protection
Format: 16 bits
connected to DI1/CTP and 0V terminals.
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned to PTC (0):
the input. PTC sensor.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is KTY84-130 (1):
taken into account.
PT1000 (2):
08.26 : DO1 Digital output source PT1000 sensor.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting : 10.03 (Zero speed)
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the source which you wish to
assign to digital output DO1.
Any non-protected «bit» type parameter can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, no assignment is
taken into account.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
08.96 : Sensor temperature
Range: 0 to 200°C
Format: 16 bits
The temperature displayed in 08.96
0V and if 05.70
is 0°C when 05.70 is set to 0 or 2.
08.97 : Threshold (KTY or PT1000)

Range: 0 to 200°C
Format: 16 bits
protection trip (when KTY or PT1000 sensor connected).
08.98 : Thermal monitoring status (Drive terminal)
Not triggered (0):

Temperature of the probe connected on DI1/CTP does not
exceed the limit.
Triggered (1):
The temperature of the probe connected on DI1/CTP exceeds
the limit or the probe is opened.
08.99 : Thermal monitoring status (MDX-option)
RESOLVER PTC sensor if 05.70 = 2.

Not triggered (0):
Temperature of the probe connected on the MDX-option does
not exceed the limit.
Triggered (1):
The temperature of the probe connected on the MDX-option
exceeds the limit or the probe is opened.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.10 - Menu 9: Logic functions
• Logic functions
Logic function
source 1
09.x4 Logic function
source 1 invert
09.x5
1 Logic function
State 1 destination
Logic function
output invert 09.x0
0
09.x8
Logic Logic function
function source 2 Logic output
function 1
09.x6 source &
2 invert 09.xx
09.x7
1 0
State 2
Source 1 Source 2 Source

Source 1 Source 2 Output invert Output
invert invert destination
Function 1 09.04 09.06 09.05 09.07 09.08 09.01 09.10
Function 2 09.14 09.16 09.15 09.17 09.18 09.02 09.20
09.64 09.66 09.65 09.67 09.68 09.61 09.60
Function 4 09.74 09.76 09.75 09.77 09.78 09.71 09.70
Logic function source 1

09.x4 Source
1 invert
09.x5
1
State 1
Logic function source 2 Logic function

Source destination
09.x6 2 invert Invert
09.x0
09.x7 09.x8
1 Logic function
State 2 output
1
&
0 09.x1
Logic function source 3 0

Source 3
09.x2 invert
09.x3
1
State 3
Source 1 Source 2 Source 3 Output

Source 1 Source 2 Source 3 Output Destination
invert invert invert invert
09.84 09.86 09.82 09.85 09.87 09.83 09.88 09.81 09.80
Function 6 09.94 09.96 09.92 09.95 09.97 09.93 09.98 09.91 09.90

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Motorised potentiometer function
Motorised potentiometer Motorised potentiometer

mode destination
09.21 09.25
Motorised % Motorised
potentiometer +100 potentiometer Motorised
up 0 reference potentiometer
t
09.26 scale factor
%
+100 09.03 09.24
0
Motorised
potentiometer
down –100
09.27 09.22 Motorised potentiometer
bipolar select
Motorised
09.23 potentiometer rate
09.28
Motorised potentiometer reset
• Binary sum functions
Bit 0
09.29 Binary sum
output offset Binary sum
Bit 1 destination
09.30 09.34
Bit 2 09.33
09.31
Binary
0 0 0 0 sum
0 0 1 1 output
0 1 0 2 +
0 1 1 3
09.32
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7
Binary sum 2
zero source
09.52
Binary sum 2
ones source
09.53
Binary sum 2
twos source
09.54 Binary sum 2 Binary sum 2
output offset destination
09.55 09.57
0 0 0 0 Binary sum
0 0 1 1 2 output
0 1 0 2 +
0 1 1 3
09.56
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 5
1 1 0 6
1 1 1 7

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.10.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 9 09.08 : Logic function 1 output invert
09.01 : Logic function 1 output
This parameter is used to invert the output of logic function 1.
Disabled (0):
09.02 : Logic function 2 output Output not inverted.
Enabled (1):
Output inverted.
Indicate the state of the output of logic functions 1 and 2.
09.09 : Not used
09.03 : Motorised potentiometer reference 09.10 : Logic function 1 output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Indicates the motorised potentiometer reference level.
assigned by the output of logic function 1.
09.04 : Logic function 1 source 1 Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will
Factory setting: 00.00 not be taken into account.
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select source 1 for logic function 1. 09.11 to 09.13 : Not used
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on this input.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen 09.14 : Logic function 2 source 1
at 0. Range: 00.00 to 21.51
09.05 : Logic function 1 source 1 invert Format : 16 bits
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This parameter is used to select source 1 for logic function 2.
Factory setting: Disabled (0) Only «bit» type parameters can be used on this input.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen
This parameter is used to invert source 1 of logic function 1. at 0.
Disabled (0):
Source 1 not inverted. 09.15 : Logic function 2 source 1 invert
Enabled (1): Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Source 1 inverted.
This parameter is used to invert source 1 of logic function 2.
09.06 : Logic function 1 source 2
Disabled (0):
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Source 1 not inverted.
Format: 16 bits Enabled (1):
This parameter is used to select source 2 for logic function 1. Source 1 inverted.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen 09.16 : Logic function 2 source 2
at 0. Range: 00.00 to 21.51
09.07 : Logic function 1 source 2 invert Format: 16 bits
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This parameter is used to select source 2 for logic function 2.
Factory setting: Disabled (0) Only «bit» type parameters can be used on these inputs.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen
This parameter is used to invert source 2 of logic function 1. at 0.
Disabled (0):
09.17 : Logic function 2 source 2 invert
Enabled (1): Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Source 2 inverted.
Disabled (0):
Enabled (1):
Source 2 inverted.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
09.18 : Logic function 2 output invert 09.23 : Motorised potentiometer rate
Factory setting: Disabled (0) Factory setting: 20 s
Format: 16 bits
Disabled (0):
Output not inverted.
Enabled (1):
Output inverted.
09.24 : Motorised potentiometer scale factor
09.19 : Not used Factory setting: 1.00
Format: 16 bits
09.20 : Logic function 2 output destination The maximum value of the up/down potentiometer reference
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 automatically takes the maximum value of the parameter to
Factory setting: 00.00 which it is assigned.
Format: 16 bits This parameter can therefore be used to adapt the maximum
value of the motorised potentiometer reference to the
assigned by the output of logic function 2. maximum value required by the application.
Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed. Example:
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will - The motorised potentiometer reference is addressed to a
not be taken into account. preset reference with the Range +01.06.
- If 01.06
09.21 : Motorised potentiometer mode motorised potentiometer reference corresponds to 1000 rpm:
Range: Reset/Enable (0), Previous/Enable (1),
1000
==> 09.24 = = 0.67
Spd.01
Factory setting: Reset/Disable (2)
09.25 :Motorised potentiometer destination

Reset/Enable (0):
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
The reference is reset to 0 on each power-up. The up/down
and reset inputs are active at all times.
Format: 16 bits
Previous/Enable (1):
On power-up, the reference is at the same level as before power- which the motorised potentiometer reference will control.
down. The up/down and reset inputs are active at all times. Example: The motorised potentiometer reference acts as
Reset/Disable (2): a speed reference. The motorised potentiometer reference
The reference is reset to 0 on each power-up. The up/down can be sent to a preset reference (eg: 01.21: PR1: Preset
inputs are only active when the drive output is active. The reference)
reset input is active at all times.
Previous/Disable (3): 09.26 : Motorised potentiometer up
On power-up, the reference is at the same level as before Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
power-down. The up/down inputs are only active when the
drive output is active. The reset input is active at all times. A digital input must be assigned to this parameter for
controlling the motorised potentiometer up function.
Min. Ref/Enable (4):
On power-up, the reference value equals the minimum speed
09.27 : Motorised potentiometer down
(01.07). The up/down and reset inputs are active at all times.
Min. Ref/Disable (5):
On power-up, the reference value equals the minimum speed A digital input must be assigned to this parameter for
(01.07). The up/down inputs are only active when the drive controlling the motorised potentiometer down function.
output is active. The reset input is active at all times.
09.28 : Motorised potentiometer reset
09.22 : Motorised potentiometer bipolar select Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Range: Positive (0) or Bipolar (1)
Factory setting: Positive (0)
When this parameter is at Enabled (1), the motorised
Positive (0): potentiometer reference is reset to zero.
The motorised potentiometer reference is limited to positive
09.29 to 09.31 : Binary sum inputs
Bipolar (1): Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Used to modify, using a combination of digital inputs, a parameter

whose selection includes more than 2 possible choices.
09.29: Binary sum zero input.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
09.30: Binary sum ones input. 09.55 : Binary sum 2 output offset
09.31: Binary sum twos input.
09.31 09.30 09.29 Factory setting: 0

Decimal conversion
(bit 2) (bit 1) (bit 0)
Used to add an offset to the binary sum 2 output.
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2 09.56 : Binary sum 2 output
0 1 1
1 0 0 4
1 0 1 Used to read the decimal value of binary sum 2 output.
1 1 0 6
09.57 : Binary sum 2 destination
1 1 1 7 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits
09.32 : Binary sum output
control. Any bit, switch or numerical type parameter can be
assigned to the binary sum 2 output.
Used to read the decimal value of the binary sum output.
09.58 and 09.59 : Not used
09.33 : Binary sum destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 09.60 : Logic 3 output destination
Factory setting: 00.00 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: 00.00
Format: 16 bits
Any bit, switch or numerical type parameter can be assigned
to the binary sum.
Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed.
09.34 : Binary sum output offset If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will
not be taken into account.
Factory setting: 0
09.61 : Logic function 3 out
Used to add an offset to the binary sum output.
09.35 to 09.51 : Not used
09.52 to 09.54 : Binary sum 2 sources

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
09.62 and 09.63 : Not used
Format: 16 bits
Used to modify, using a combination of binary parameters, 09.64 : Logic function 3 source 1
a parameter whose selection includes more than 2 possible Range: 00.00 to 21.51
choices. Factory setting: 00.00
09.52: Binary sum 2 zero source. Format: 16 bits
09.53: Binary sum 2 ones source.
09.54: Binary sum 2 twos source. Only «bit» type parameters can be used on these inputs.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be
09.54 09.53 09.52 frozen at 0.
Decimal conversion
(bit 2) (bit 1) (bit 0)
0 0 0 0 09.65 : Logic function 3 source 1 invert
0 0 1 1 Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
0 1 0 2 Factory setting: Disabled (0)
0 1 1
1 0 0 4
Disabled (0):
1 0 1 Source 1 not inverted.
1 1 0 6
Enabled (1):
1 1 1 7 Source 1 inverted.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
09.66 : Logic function 3 source 2 09.75 : Logic function 4 source 1 invert
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Factory setting: 00.00 Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Format: 16 bits
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on these inputs. Disabled (0):
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be Source 1 not inverted.
frozen at 0.
Enabled (1):
Source 1 inverted.
09.67 : Logic 3 source 2 invert
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits
Disabled (0):
This parameter is used to select source 2 for logic function 4.
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on these inputs.
Enabled (1): If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be
Source 2 inverted. frozen at 0.
09.68 : Logic function 3 output invert 09.77 : Logic function 4 source 2 invert
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Factory setting: Disabled (0) Factory setting: Disabled (0)

Disabled (0): Disabled (0):
Output not inverted. Source 2 not inverted.
Enabled (1): Enabled (1):
Output inverted. Source 2 inverted.
09.69 : Not used 09.78 : Logic function 4 output invert

09.70 : Logic 4 output destination Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 This parameter is used to invert the output of logic function 4.
Format: 16 bits Disabled (0):
assigned by the output of logic function 4.
Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed. Enabled (1):
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will Output inverted.
09.79 : Not used
09.71 : Logic function 4 out 09.80 : Logic 5 output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Factory setting: 00.00
Format: 16 bits
Indicates the state of the output of logic function 4.
and Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed.

09.72 09.73 : Not used
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 09.81 : Logic function 5 out
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select source 1 for logic function 4. Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on these inputs.
frozen at 0.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
09.82 : Logic function 5 source 3 09.89 : Not used
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 09.90 : Logic function 6 destination
Format: 16 bits Range: 00.00 to 21.51
frozen at 0. assigned by the output of logic function 6.
Only non-protected «bit» type parameters can be addressed.
09.83 : Logic function 3 source 3 invert If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the destination will
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) not be taken into account.
09.91 : Logic function 6 out

Disabled (0):
Enabled (1): Indicates the state of the output of logic function 6.

09.84 : Logic function 5 source 1 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Factory setting: 00.00
Factory setting: 00.00 Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on this input. If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0.
frozen at 0.
09.85 : Logic function 5 source 1 invert Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Disabled (0):
Disabled (0):
Enabled (1):
Enabled (1):
Source 1 inverted.
09.86 : Logic function 5 source 2 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits This parameter is used to select source 1 for logic function 6.
Only «bit» type parameters can be used on this input. If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0.
frozen at 0.
09.87 : Logic function 5 source 2 invert Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Factory setting: Disabled (0)
Disabled (0):
Disabled (0): Source 1 not inverted.
Enabled (1):
Enabled (1): Source 1 inverted.
Source 2 inverted.
09.88 : Logic function 5 output invert


4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select source 2 for logic function 6.
frozen at 0.


Disabled (0):
Enabled (1):
Source 2 inverted.
09.98 : Logic function 6 output invert


4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.11 - Menu 10: Trip management drive states
• Operating states
10.01 Drive healthy 10.20 Last trip
10.02 Drive active 10.21 Trip -2
10.03 Zero speed 10.22 Trip -3
10.04 Running at minimum speed 10.23 Trip -4
10.05 Below set speed 10.24 Trip -5
10.06 At speed 10.25 Trip -6
10.07 Above set speed 10.26 Trip -7
10.08 Nominal load reached 10.27 Trip -8
10.09 Drive output at current limit 10.28 Trip -9
10.10 Regenerating operation 10.29 Trip -10
10.11 Braking IGBT active 10.40 Status word 10.01 to 10.15
10.13 Direction commanded 10.52 Maximum speed alarm
10.14 Direction running 10.53 Maximum speed
10.15 Mains loss 10.76 Preload contactor closed
10.16 DC bus undervoltage 10.97 Alarm status
10.17 Motor overload alarm 10.98 Drive status
10.18 Drive over temperature alarm 10.99 Current trip
10.19 Drive general warning

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Braking IGBT active
10.12 Braking resistor alarm
10.30 Full power braking time
10.31 Operating mode
10.39 Braking energy overload accumulator
• Trip management
10.33 Drive reset
10.34 No. of autoreset attempts
10.35 Auto reset delay
10.36 Drive healthy if auto resets
10.37 Braking IGBT present & Minor trip stop mode
10.38 Serial link user trip
10.54 User alarm 1
10.55 User alarm 2
10.56 User alarm 3
10.57 User alarm 4
10.59 Motor phase missing trip validation
10.60 I imbalanced trip validation
10.61 User trip 1
10.63 User trip 2
10.65 User trip 3
10.67 User trip 4
10.69 Trip enable to off
10.80 Auto reset type
10.81 Special trip n°1
• Miscellaneous
10.74 Preload time
10.75 Powered by DC bus
10.77 4Q rectifier disable

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.11.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 10
10.06 : At speed
10.01 : Drive healthy

This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the absolute value of the
motor speed is between 01.03 - (03.06 ÷ 2) and 01.03 + (03.06
÷ 2).
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the drive is not tripped. If
parameter 10.36 indicates Yes (1), this bit will remain at Yes (1)
during the trip phase if an auto-reset is supposed to occur. Once
10.07 : Above set speed
the number of auto-resets is reached, the next trip will cause this
bit to change to zero.
If 10.01 10.99 provides information about the
current trip.
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the absolute value of the
motor speed is greater than 01.03 + (03.06 ÷ 2).
10.07
10.02 : Drive active
[01.03 + (03.06
CAUTION:
If 03.06 < 20 rpm, the speed may be situated in the
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the drive output is active. hysteresis dead band.
10.03 : Zero speed 10.08 : Nominal load reached
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the absolute value This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the active current 04.02
is greater than or equal to the rated active current.
parameter 03.05. Rated active current = 05.07 x 05.10.
10.03
03.05 + 10 rpm.
10.09 : Drive output at current limit
10.04 : Running at minimum speed
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when drive current limiting is

active.
In bipolar mode (01.10 = Yes (1)), the operation of this parameter
is identical to that of parameter 10.03.
In unipolar mode (01.10 10.10 : Regenerating operation
(1) if the absolute value of the ramp output is at or below the
minimum speed 01.07
poles).
10.04 This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the power is being
[01.07 transferred from the motor to the DC bus (driving load).
01.07.
10.11 : Braking IGBT active

10.05 : Below set speed
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the power is dissipated into
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the absolute value of the the optional braking resistor (if this is connected).
motor speed is less than 01.03 - (03.06 ÷ 2).
10.05
[01.03 - (03.06
CAUTION: 10.12 : Braking resistor alarm
If 03.06 < 20 rpm, the speed may be situated in the
hysteresis dead band.
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the integration
parameter for the braking resistor load becomes greater than

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
10.13 : Direction commanded 10.20 to 10.29 : Last 10 trips stored
Range: Forward (0) or Reverse (1) Range: 0 to 102
This parameter indicates Reverse (1) if the pre-ramp Contains the last 10 drive trips.
reference is negative. 10.20: Indicates the most recent trip.
It indicates Forward (0) if the pre-ramp reference is positive. 10.29: Indicates the oldest trip.
See the list of trips in section 7.
NOTE
10.14 : Direction running Some trips are not displayed at standstill (see 10.69) and no
trips at standstill are stored.
Range: Forward (0) or Reverse (1)
10.30 : Full power braking time
This parameter indicates Reverse (1) if the post-ramp
Range: 0.0 to 400.0 s
reference is negative.
It indicates Forward (0) if the post-ramp reference is positive.
Format: 16 bits
10.15 : Mains loss

POWERDRIVE MD2 version T and 1100 V for POWERDRIVE
MD2
time before the drive trips due to braking overload.
This parameter indicates Yes (1) during loss of the AC
CAUTION:
mains power supply. This parameter is only enabled when
If this parameter is left at 0, the braking resistor will not
parameter 06.03
be protected. This is why a thermal overload protection
device must be added to protect the braking resistor.
10.16 : DC bus undervoltage
10.31 : Operating mode
Factory setting: 0.0 mn

This parameter indicates Yes (1) when the bus voltage level Format: 16 bits
is too low.
between two consecutive braking periods at full power as
10.30
10.17 : Motor overload alarm time constant for the resistor used.
Overload
accumulator
10.39 Max.
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when parameter 04.19
10.18 : Drive overtemperature alarm
Ambient
This parameter indicates Yes (1) when one of the 10.30
temperatures displayed for 07.51 to 07.55 10.31
the max permitted value or the drive Ixt level 04.21 exceeds
CAUTION:
If this parameter is left at 0, the braking resistor will not
10.19 : Drive general warning be protected.
10.32 : Not used

Drive general warning = Yes (1) if Braking resistor alarm 10.12
or Motor overload alarm 10.17 or Drive overtemperature
alarm 10.18 = Yes (1).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
10.33 : Drive reset Yes, controlled (1):
Enabling of the «Brak. IGBT» trip and controlled stop on a
minor trip (deceleration before tripping of the drive).
In the event of a problem on the braking IGBT, the drive trips
on «Brak. IGBT».
A change in this parameter from Disabled (0) to Enabled (1)
will cause a drive reset.
If a remote drive reset is required, a terminal must be No, freewheel (2):
assigned to this parameter. Disabling of «Brak. IGBT» trip and freewheel stop on a minor
If the drive trips due to IGBT overcurrent (Brak. IGBT), either trip.
at the output bridge (Over current) or the braking transistor, the No, controlled (3):
drive cannot be reset for 10 seconds (IGBT recovery time). Disabling of the «Brak. IGBT» trip and controlled stop on a
minor trip (deceleration before tripping of the drive).
10.34 : No. of autoreset attempts NOTE
Minor trips: Th IGBT U or V or W, Motor PTC, 24 V over ld, AI2
Fieldbus loss, User 1 to 10, Internal ventilation.
10.38 : Serial link user trip

None (0):
There will be no automatic reset even when the 10.80 is not 0.
Factory setting: 0
1 reset to 5 resets (1 to 5):
There will be as many automatic reset attempts as have been This parameter is used to generate user trips, via the serial link.
programmed.
When the counter reaches the permitted number of reset
attempts, the drive is disabled and will not auto-reset. This «user 10» trips. Set 10.38 back to 0 before resetting the trip.
last trip can only be reset via a command.
If no trips occur, the counter is decremented by one value
10.39 : Braking energy overload accumulator
10.35 : Auto reset delay

Format: 16 bits
Factory setting: 1.0 s This parameter gives an indication of the braking resistor
Format: 16 bits temperature modelled according to parameters 10.30 and
10.31. A zero value means that the resistor is close to the
and the automatic reset (subject to a minimum stop time for
trips relating to overcurrents).
(trip level).
10.36 : Drive healthy if auto resets
10.40 : Status word 10.01 to 10.15
No (0):
10.01 Format: 16 bits
without taking account of any auto-resets that might occur. This parameter is used with a serial communications interface.
Yes (1): The value of this parameter is the addition of the drive bits
Parameter 10.01 is held at Yes (1) during the trip phases envisaged for read-only mode, with the following binary weights:
which are reset automatically. - 10.01 = 20
- 10.02 = 21
- 10.03 = 22
10.37 : Braking IGBT present & Minor trip stop mode
Range: Yes, freewheel (0), Yes, controlled (1), - 10.04 = 2
- 10.05 = 24
- 10.06 = 2
- 10.07 = 26
- 10.08 = 27
Yes, freewheel (0): - 10.09 = 2
Enabling of the «Brak. IGBT» trip and freewheel stop on a - 10.10 = 29
minor trip. - 10.11 = 210
In the event of a problem on the braking IGBT, the drive trips - 10.12 = 211
on «Brak. IGBT». - 10.13 = 212
(Used with the braking transistor option.) - 10.14 = 2
- 10.15 = 214
10.41 to 10.51 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
10.62 : Not used
10.63 : User trip 2
10.52 : Maximum speed alarm
Changes to Enabled (1) when the motor speed (05.04) > Vmax Disabled (0):
(01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 in Voltage control mode or speed The drive has not tripped.
(03.02) > Vmax (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 Enabled (1):
mode. The drive trips, decelerates in freewheel mode and generates
10.52 changes to Disabled (0) when the speed is less than a user trip 2 code.
(05.04) > Vmax (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 - 10 rpm in Voltage
control, or (03.02) > Vmax (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.52 - 10 rpm. 10.64 : Not used
10.65 : User trip 3

10.53 : Maximum speed
Changes to Enabled (1) when the motor speed (05.04) > Vmax Disabled (0):
(01.06 or 21.01 The drive has not tripped.
10.53 changes back to Disabled (0) when the speed is less Enabled (1):
than (05.04) > Vmax (01.06 or 21.01) - 03.53 The drive trips, decelerates in freewheel mode and generates
10.54 to 10.57 : User alarms 1 to 4

Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) 10.66 : Not used
10.67 : User trip 4
When these parameters change to Enabled (1), the drive Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
goes into alarm mode (drive does not trip). Factory setting: Disabled (0)
10.58 : Not used

Disabled (0):
The drive has not tripped.
10.59 : Motor phase missing trip validation
Enabled (1):
The drive trips, decelerates in freewheel mode and generates
a user trip 4 code.
No (0): 10.68 : Not used

Output phase loss trip detection disabled.
Yes (1): 10.69 : Trip enable to OFF
Output phase loss trip detection enabled. Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
NOTE Factory setting: Disabled (0)
If the brake is enabled, the output phase loss trip is taken into
account regardless of the state of 10.59. This parameter is used to make drive trips active at standstill.
The trips concerned are: IGBT U, V and W, Autotune, I
10.60 : I imbalanced trip validation
Factory setting: Yes (1) phase, UVW invert, Internal ventilation.
Used to enable the Current Imbalanced trip. 10.70 to 10.73 : Not used
10.61 : User trip 1 10.74 : Preload time

Factory setting: Disabled (0) Factory setting: 1 s
Format: 16 bits
Where the drive manages the preloading of capacitors on
Disabled (0):
the DC bus (10.75
The drive has not tripped.
Enabled (1): several inverters.
The drive trips, decelerates in freewheel mode and generates
a user trip 1 code.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
10.75 : Powered by DC bus 10.82 : Special trip n°2
Range: 0 to 102
Factory setting: 0
No (0): Enter the number of the trip which should or should not be
The drive is connected to an AC supply. The drive manages reset automatically depending on the setting of 10.80.
the preloading of capacitors on the DC bus. See the list of trips in section 7.
Yes (1):
The drive is supplied directly on its DC bus. The preloading of 10.83 : Special trip n°3
capacitors on the DC bus must be managed externally. Range: 0 to 102
Factory setting: 0
NOTE
• When 10.75
Enter the number of the trip which should or should not be
disabled («RECTIFIER Th» is no longer active).
reset automatically depending on the setting of 10.80.
• 10.75 must be set to Yes (1) for POWERDRIVE Regen
(MD2R) units.
10.84 : Special trip n°4
10.76 : Preload contactor closed Range: 0 to 102
Factory setting: 0
Enter the number of the trip which should or should not be

No (0):
Short-circuiting of the DC bus preload system is not permitted.
Yes (1): 10.85 and 10.96 : Not used
Short-circuiting for the DC bus preload system may be
permitted.
NOTE 10.97 : Alarm status
10.76 operates with 10.75 at yes (1). The relay switches
Range: 0 to 22
value.
The alarms are for information only: the drive continues to
operate but may switch to fault mode if no corrective action
10.78 and 10.79 : Not used is taken.
10.80 : Auto reset type

Range: Controlled (0) or Automatic (1),
10.98 : Drive status
Factory setting: Controlled (0)
Controlled (0): This information about the drive status is also available on the
Trip reset by a Reset command on the terminals or via the two digits on the control board.
parameter-setting interface. See section 7.2.
Automatic (1):
All trips automatically reset.
Auto for 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084 (2): 10.99 : Current trip
Selective reset of trips listed in 10.81, 10.82, 10.83 and 10.84.
Range: 0 to 102
Auto except 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084 (3):
Selective reset of all trips except trips listed in 10.81, 10.82, Contains the code for the current trip. Value 0 indicates that
10.83 and 10.84. the drive has not tripped. The other values indicate the trip
NOTE number. See section 7.4.
10.81 : Special trip n°1

Range: 0 to 102
Factory setting: 0
Enter the number of the trips which should or should not be


4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.12 - Menu 11: Drive configuration, Serial link
• Menu 0 configuration
11.01 Assignment of Apl.01 11.11 Assignment of Apl.11

• Drive configuration
11.29 Drive software version 11.33 Drive voltage rating
11.31 User drive mode

11.60 Drive identification code
11.32 Drive current rating

11.34 : Drive Ixt function trip threshold
• Parameter setting
11.43 Factory settings 11.64 Save parameters to EEPROM

11.45 Motor parameter select 11.65 Menu to be saved
11.61 Advanced menu access code 11.66 Communication type between drives
• Serial link
11.23 Serial address 11.25 Baud rate

11.26 Min comms transmit delay
11.24 Serial mode 11.27 Parity type, number of stop bits
11.63 Standard serial link Timeout
• Miscellaneous
11.67 Coder module presence 11.68 Option module presence

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
11.24 : Serial mode
11.01 to 11.20 : Assignment of parameters
Apl.01 to Apl.20
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: See table below. This parameter indicates which protocol is being used for the
Format: 16 bits current communication on the drive’s P2 connector serial link.
These parameters can be used, in order, to assign parameters LS NET (0):
Apl.01 to Apl.20 of the «Quick setup» menu.
Factory Factory MODBUS RTU (1):
setting setting MODBUS RTU protocol.
Quick setup Quick setup
If 11.43 = 1 If 11.43 = 2
menu assignment
(Centrifugal (Brake motor 11.25 : Baud rate
application) application)
11.01 Apl.01 09.21 12.41 Factory setting: 19200 (6)
11.02 Apl.02 09.23 12.42
11.03 Apl.03 09.24 12.43 Used to select the data transfer speed for MODBUS RTU.
11.04 Apl.04 09.25 12.44 Speed (baud) 11.25
11.05 Apl.05 12.74 12.45 1200 0
11.06 Apl.06 12.77 12.46 1200 1
11.07 Apl.07 12.78 12.47 1200 2
11.08 Apl.08 12.84 03.05 2400
11.09 Apl.09 12.87 00.00 4
11.10 Apl.10 12.88 00.00 9600
11.11 Apl.11 14.03 00.00 19200 6
11.12 Apl.12 14.04 00.00 7
11.13 Apl.13 14.08 00.00
11.14 Apl.14 14.16 00.00 9
11.15 Apl.15 14.10 00.00
11.16 Apl.16 14.11 00.00 NOTE
11.17 Apl.17 14.61 00.00 This parameter is used only for the MODBUS RTU link of the
11.18 Apl.18 14.60 00.00
11.19 Apl.19 00.00 00.00
11.20 Apl.20 00.00 00.00
the MDX-MODBUS option.
NOTE
If 11.43 11.26 : Min comms transmit delay
the default value of parameters 11.01 to 11.20 and Apl.01 to Range: 0 to 100 ms
Apl.20 will be 0. Factory setting: 2 ms
Format: 16 bits
As the serial link is 2-wire type, Rx is connected to Tx and Rx\
11.21 and 11.22 : Not used
to Tx\. A communication-related trip may occur if the receiver
responds to a request before the transmitter has had time to
11.23 : Serial address switch. Parameter 11.26 is used to introduce a time between
Range: 0 to 247 reception and return of data. After transmission of a request,
Factory setting: 1
Format: 16 bits The adjustment is made in 2 ms intervals.
NOTE
supervision via the serial link in MODBUS RTU. Avoid values
containing a zero as they are used to address groups of drives.
NOTE RTU link of the MDX-MODBUS option, refer to the manual ref.
This parameter is used only for the MODBUS RTU link of the
11.27 : Parity type, number of stop bits

the MDX-MODBUS option.
No parity, 2 stop bits (0):
No parity, 1 stop bit (1):
Even parity, 1 stop bit (2):

Even parity, 1 stop bit.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Odd parity, 1 stop bit (3): NC (3)
Odd parity, 1 stop bit.
PM: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSRPM) (4):
NOTE Dedicated for PM motors with a low saliency ratio (< 2)
This parameter is used only for the MODBUS RTU link of the
feedback (see 03.38).
NC (5)
MDX-MODBUS option.
PMASR: Oriented flux ctrl. (LSHRM) (6):
11.28 : Not used Dedicated for PMASR motors or IPM motors with high saliency
speed feedback (see 03.38).

11.29 : Drive software version
11.31 : User drive mode
Range: ± 9.99 Range: Synchronous motor: Voltage control (0),
Format: 16 bits Induction motor: Voltage control (1),
Indicates the drive software version.
11.30 : Motor technology selection

DC/DC converter (7)
Factory setting: Induction motor: Voltage control (1)
The operating mode can only be selected when the drive is

stopped.
CAUTION:
Each time the parameter 11.30 is changed, some parameters
• If the mode is changed with a fieldbus option, reset the
related to the motor technology are automatically overwrited
option (15.32 = ON).
according to the table below.
• If 11.30 ≠ 0, do not edit 11.31 value (automatic preset
Pr 11.30 values sequence).
Related
Parameters 0 3&5 1 2 4 6 Synchronous motor: Voltage control (0):
Reserved.
03.38 - 6 6 6 6 7 Induction motor: Voltage control (1):
03.42 - Induction motor controlled in Voltage control mode (without
04.12 - 2 2 2 2 0 speed feedback). See also 05.14.
Induction motor: Oriented flux control (2):
04.55 - 0 1 0 0 1
05.26 - 0 0 0 0 1 speed feedback or with the sensorless function. See also
05.31 - 1000 1000 1000 1000 03.38.
05.36 - 1 1 1 1 0 Synchronous motor: Oriented flux control (3):
Synchronous or Permanent magnet motor controlled in oriented
05.37 - 0 0 0 0 1
05.52 - function. See also 03.38.
05.55 - Grid inverter for REGEN drive (4):
05.56 - 1 0 0 1 1
05.62 - 0 0 0 0 2 by DC bus regulation.
05.64 - Grid inverter in current mode (5):
05.70 - 0 0 0 0 1
05.71 -
be controlled by external reference (18.28 = 0) or by DC bus
05.90 - 0 0 0 0 1 regulation (18.28 = 1).
11.31 - 1 1 2 Islanded inverter (6):
None (0): The inverter is used to create an islanded AC Grid (refer to
DC/DC converter (7):

Induction motor: voltage vector ctrl (1): See application note related to DC/DC converter (please
Dedicated for induction motors controlled in Voltage control contact Leroy-Somer).
mode (see 05.14).
Induction motor: Oriented flux ctrl (2):
control mode with or without speed feedback (see 03.38).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
11.45 : Motor parameter select
11.32 : Drive current rating Range: Motor 1 (0) or Motor 2 (1)
Factory setting: Motor 1 (0)
This parameter is used to select the set of parameters

Drive rated current when it is connected to a motor operating corresponding to the characteristics of motor 1 or 2.
with reduced overload.
11.45 = 0 11.45 = 1
Description
(motor 1) (motor 2)
11.33 : Drive voltage rating 01.06 21.01 Maximum reference clamp
01.07 21.02 Minimum reference clamp
Range: 200 to 690 V 01.14 21.03 Reference selector
Format: 16 bits
02.11 21.04 Acceleration rate 1
This parameter indicates the rated voltage of the drive
02.21 21.05 Deceleration rate 1
according to its rating and 06.10.
05.06 21.06 Motor rated frequency
05.07 21.07 Motor rated current
11.34 : Drive Ixt function trip threshold
05.08 21.08 Motor rated speed
05.09 21.09 Motor rated voltage
05.10 21.10 Rated power factor
Parameter 11.34 is used to protect the drive thermally for 05.11 21.11
05.17 21.12 Stator resistance
its modules alone (high switching frequency, etc). 05.23 21.13 Voltage offset
- When the drive output thermal current exceeds 05.24 21.14 Motor Transient inductance / Ld
11.34 x 11.32, parameter 10.19 (drive general warning) is - 21.15 Motor 2 map enable
set to «Yes». 05.25 21.24 Stator inductance Ls
- 05.33 21.30 Motor volt per 1000 rpm (Ke)
11.34 x 11.32, the drive displays a «Ixt drive overload trip. Q axis inductance (synchronous
05.51 21.51
motor)
11.35 to 11.42 : Not used
11.46 to 11.51 : Not used
11.43 : Factory settings
Range: Disabled (0), Centrifugal application (1),
11.52 : Drive Serial Number LS Read
Reserved.
Disabled (0):
When the drive has completed the procedure for returning to 11.53 : Drive Serial Number MS Read
factory settings, 11.43 returns to «Disabled».
Centrifugal application (1): Reserved.
Return to factory settings of all parameters and adaptation
of the «Quick setup» menu to a centrifugal application 11.54 to 11.59 : Not used
(quadratic torque). The «Additional settings 1» Apl menu
becomes active (refer to section4.2.7).
“Centrifuge application” is not restrictive and also 11.60 : Drive identification code
covers the common applications such as pumps, fans,
compressors, mixers, extruders, crushers.
Brake motor application (2): Format: 16 bits
Return to factory settings of all parameters and adaptation of This product code gives information on the drive rating, size,
the «Quick setup» menu to an application with brake motor. hardware version and variant.
The «Additional settings 2» Apl menu becomes active (refer When the nameplate is not visible, this code can be given to
your Leroy-Somer contact.
Other application (3):
Return to factory settings of all parameters without adaptation 11.61 : Level 1 menu protection password
of the «Quick setup» menu. The «Additional settings 1 & 2» Range: 0 to 9999
Apl menus are inactive. Factory setting: 149
Format: 16 bits
NOTE
This parameter is used to limit access to menus 1 to 21 when
setting the parameters via the parameter-setting interface.
adapt the «Additional settings» Apl menu to his application. In
If this parameter is not 0, the value of parameter 11.61 must
this case, refer to parameters 11.01 to 11.20.
be entered to enable switching to the advanced menu, such
as for example to switch from the «Quick setup» menu to the
11.44 : Not used «Advanced setting» menu.
In factory settings mode, simply enter the value 149 to access
all menus.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
11.62 : Not used Encoder Slave (8):
Reserved.
11.63 : Standard serial link Timeout Inverter <-> rectifier (9):
Reserved.
Format: 16 bits
Used to generate the «COM loss» trip if no communication 11.67 : Encoder module presence
has taken place within the time period set by this parameter.
The value 0 deactivates monitoring of the communication on
the drive’s P2 connector. The Timeout does not take effect
Indicates the presence of an optional sensor feedback
until one minute after power-up. module, connected to the drive.
No (0):
11.64 : Save parameters to EEPROM
MDX-ENCODER (1):
This parameter is used to store in EEPROM the values of to the drive.

MDX-RESOLVER (2):
1) Choose the menu(s) to be saved (11.65 = 0 to save all Presence of an optional MDX-RESOLVER module,
menus) connected to the drive.
2) Initiate the save operation, 11.64 = Yes (1)
11.64
11.68 : Option module presence
11.65 : Menu to be saved

Range: 0 to 21
Factory setting: 0 Indicates the presence of an optional MDX-I/O module,
connected to the drive.
This parameter is used to choose the menu(s) to be saved No (0):
(11.65 = 0 for all menus).
MDX-I/O (1):
11.66 : Communication type between drives Presence of an optional MDX-I/O M2M module, connected to
the drive.
MDX-I/O LITE (2):
Presence of an optional MDX-I/O Lite module, connected to
the drive.
link communication to select according to the drive

communication.
None (0):
Inverter of Regen (1):
Rectifier of Regen (2):
Twin drive Master (3):

Reserved.
Twin drive Slave (4):
Reserved.
Synchro Master (5):
Reserved.
Synchro Slave (6):
Reserved.
Encoder Master (7):
Reserved.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.13 - Menu 12: Comparator and function blocks
• Comparators
Comparator Comparator Comparator

source hysteresis output destination
Comparator
Comparator 12.x5 output invert 12.x7
12.x3 threshold
12.x6 Comparator
12.x4 output
1
12.0x
0
Comparator Source Threshold Hysteresis Invert Output state Destination

Comparator 1 12.03 12.04 12.05 12.06 12.01 12.07
Comparator 2 12.23 12.24 12.25 12.26 12.02 12.27
Output
destination
Output type
Comparator 12.x7
Comparator 12.x6
source hysteresis State Comparator
0 before delay Output output
12.x3 Comparator 12.x5
delay
threshold 1
12.x2 12.x9 12.x1
12.x4
2
Masking on
Drive drive enable
output 10.02 12.x8
active
State before
Comparator Source Threshold Hysteresis Masking Type Time delay State Destination
delay
12.63 12.64 12.65 12.68 12.66 12.62 12.69 12.61 12.67
Comparator 4 12.73 12.74 12.75 12.78 12.76 12.72 12.79 12.71 12.77
12.83 12.84 12.85 12.88 12.86 12.82 12.89 12.81 12.87

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Processing of internal variables
Function block Function Function block

variable 1 source block select applied factor
12.x8 12.x0 12.x5 Function block
output destination
Function block
variable 1 scale 12.x1
12.x3 0 : V1
Function
1 : V2 block output
2 : V1 + V2
3 : V1 - V2
4 : (V1 x V2) / 100 12.x2
5 : (V1 / V2) x 100
Function block 6 : filter/V1
variable 2 scale
7 : ramp/V1
12.x4 8 : V1
9 : V112.x5
12.x9
Function block
variable 2 source
Variable 1 Variable 1 Variable 2 Variable 2 Function Applied Output

Block Output
source scaling source scaling selection factor destination
Block 1 12.08 12.13 12.09 12.14 12.10 12.15 12.11 12.12
Block 2 12.28 12.33 12.29 12.34 12.30 12.35 12.31 12.32

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Brake control in Voltage control mode
Upper current
threshold
12.42
Lower current
threshold Brake
+ controller
12.43
- 12.41
Current
magnitude Ramp
Drive AND hold
active 0
IN No
04.01 02.03
Absolute 10.02 IN OUT
1
value Yes
IN
Motor
frequency
Brake delay 12.46
05.01
LATCH
Absolute +
value ON Post-brake
- OUT release delay 12.47
Run/Stop OFF
Brake release command
speed Brake
AND release
12.44
01.11 IN Forced 1
brake release 12.40
OUT 12.51
0
Brake apply +
speed IN
12.45 -
Drive
active 10.02
Sequencing
Run/Stop command (01.11)
Drive active (10.02)
12.42 Current (04.01)
12.44 12.45
Frequency (05.01)
12.46 12.47
Ramp hold (internal function)
Brake controller (12.40)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Brake control in flux vector mode
Reference
enable indicator OR
LATCH
IN
Motor flux + OUT ON
IN OUT
7/8 rated flux - Brake
OFF controller
Lower current
threshold 12.41
12.43 +
- Drive AND
active 0
Current IN Disabled
magnitude
10.02 IN OUT 1
Enabled
04.01
IN
Run/Stop Post-brake
command
release delay 12.47
OR
01.11 IN
Ramp 2.03
OUT hold
IN
Brake apply Hold zero 06.08
speed speed
12.45 +
Brake apply Brake
- delay 12.48 release
Motor 1
speed
12.40
12.46 Brake delay Forced brake
03.02 release 12.51
0
Absolute
value
Drive
active 10.02
Sequencing
Run/Stop command (01.11)
Drive active (10.02)

7/8
Nominal flux
or Current magnitude (04.01)
05.53 elapsed
12.45 Speed (03.02)
12.47 Ramp hold (internal function)
12.46 12.48
Brake controller (12.40)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.13.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 12 12.07 : Comparator 1 output destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
12.01 : Comparator 1 output Format: 16 bits

12.02 : Comparator 2 output Only bit type parameters can be programmed.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the output is not sent
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) anywhere.
Disabled (0): 12.08 : Function 1 variable 1 source

The input variable is less than or equal to the comparator Range: 00.00 to 21.51
threshold. Factory setting: 00.00
Format: 16 bits
Enabled (1):
The input variable is greater than the comparator threshold.
be processed.
Only «numerical» parameters can be assigned.
12.03 : Comparator 1 source If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the variable
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 will be 0.
Format: 16 bits
12.09 : Function 1 variable 2 source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
The absolute value of the variable is used.
Format: 16 bits
12.04 : Comparator 1 threshold be processed.

Any «numerical» parameter can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the variable
Format: 16 bits will be 0.
This parameter is used to set the comparator trip threshold.
The threshold is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
12.10 : Function block 1 select
value of the compared variable.
Range: See table below
Factory setting: O = V1 (0)
12.05 : Comparator 1 hysteresis
variables processing block.

Format: 16 bits
HMI name Output Comment
output will not change state.
Used to transfer an inter-
The output will change to Enabled (1) when the variable reaches 0 O = V1 = V1
nal variable
the value of the threshold + (hysteresis/2).
The output will change to Disabled (0) when the variable goes Used to transfer an inter-
1 O = V2 = V2
below the value of the threshold - (hysteresis/2). nal variable
The hysteresis is expressed as a percentage of the maximum 2 O=V1+V2 = V1 + V2 Addition of 2 variables
value of the compared variable. Subtraction of 2 va-
O=V1-V2 = V1 - V2
riables
12.06 : Comparator 1 output invert Multiplication of 2 va-
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) 4 =V1xV2/100 = (V1 x V2) ÷ 100
riables
=V1/V2x100 = (V1 x 100) x V2 Division of 2 variables
-t
This parameter is used to invert the comparator output.
6 = V1(1 - e 12.15 )
Disabled (0):
Output not inverted. Creation of a linear
Enabled (1): ramp. 12.15 is used
7 O= ramp/V1 = ramped V1
Output inverted. to adjust the value
of the ramp
O = abs (V1) = V1 Absolute value
O=
9 = V112.15 V1 to the power 12.15
V1^(12.15)
• If 12.10 equals 2, 3, 4 or 5:
When the result of the calculation is greater than or equal to
12.11

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
When the result of the calculation is greater than or equal to Function Associated parameter value
12.11
12.00
• If 12.10 equals 5:
To avoid a calculation error if V2 = 0, the result of the operation
will be 0.
12.16 to 12.22 : Not used
To avoid a calculation error, the absolute value of the signal V1
12.23 : Comparator 2 source
is taken before calculating its square root or cube root.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
12.11 : Function 1 output destination Format: 16 bits
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits
The absolute value of the variable is used. Only non-bit
This parameter is used to select the destination of the
parameters can be programmed as the source.
processed variable.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the input value is
Any non-protected «non-bit» parameter can be assigned.
taken as equal to 0.
If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the variable
taken into account is zero.
12.24 : Comparator 2 threshold
12.12 : Function block 1 output

Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to set the comparator trip threshold.
Format: 16 bits The threshold is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
Indicates the value of the function output as a percentage of the value of the compared variable.
Range of the destination parameter.
12.13 : Function 1 variable 1 scale
Range: ± 4.000
Format: 16 bits
Used to scale variable 1 before processing. output will not change state.
CAUTION: The output will change to Enabled (1) when the variable reaches
The value at the output of the scaling can only be between the value of the threshold + (hysteresis/2).
-32767 and +32767. Take this into account according to the The output will change to Disabled (0) when the variable goes
Range of the source parameter. below the value of the threshold - (hysteresis/2).
The hysteresis is expressed as a percentage of the maximum
value of the compared variable.
12.14 : Function 1 variable 2 scale
Range: ± 4.000
Factory setting: 1.000 12.26 : Comparator 2 output invert
Format: 16 bits Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Used to scale variable 2 before processing. Factory setting: Disabled (0)
CAUTION:
The value of the scaling output can only be between -32767 This parameter is used to invert the comparator output.
and +32767. Take this into account depending on the Range Disabled (0):
of the source parameter. Output not inverted.
Enabled (1):
12.15 : Function 1 applied factor Output inverted.
Range: 0.00 to 100.00
Factory setting: 0.00 12.27 : Comparator 2 output destination
Format: 16 bits Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Depending on its function, the internal variables processing Factory setting: 00.00
block may require an associated parameter. Format: 16 bits
parameter is used as a time constant; if it is used to generate assigned by the comparator output.
a ramp, this parameter is used to adjust the ramp value Only bit type parameters can be programmed.
(in seconds). The ramp time corresponds to the time for changing If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the output is not sent
anywhere.
If the block is used as a power, this parameter is used as follows:
Function Associated parameter value

V12 2.00
V1

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
12.28 : Function 2 variable 1 source 12.31 : Function 2 output destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 Factory setting: 00.00
This parameter is used to select the destination of the
be processed. processed variable.
Only «numerical» parameters can be assigned. Any non-protected «non-bit» parameter can be assigned.
If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the
variable will be 0. variable taken into account is zero.
12.29 : Function 2 variable 2 source

Range: 00.00 to 21.51 12.32 : Function block 2 output
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits
be processed. Indicates the value of the function output as a percentage of
Any «numerical» parameter can be assigned. the Range of the destination parameter.
If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of the
variable will be 0. 12.33 : Function 2 variable 1 scale
Range: ± 4.000
12.30 : Function block 2 select Factory setting: 1.000
Range: See table below Format: 16 bits
Factory setting: O = V1 (0) Used to scale variable 1 before processing.
CAUTION:
The value of the scaling output can only be between
variables processing block. -32767 and +32767. Take this into account depending on
the Range of the source parameter.
HMI name Output Comment
Used to transfer an 12.34 : Function 2 variable 2 scale
0 O = V1 = V1 Range: ± 4.000
internal variable
Used to transfer an
1 O = V2 = V2 Format: 16 bits
internal variable
Used to scale variable 2 before processing.
2 O=V1+V2 = V1 + V2 Addition of 2 variables CAUTION:
Subtraction of 2 va- The value of the scaling output can only be between
O=V1-V2 = V1 - V2
riables -32767 and +32767. Take this into account depending on
Multiplication of 2 the Range of the source parameter.
4 =V1xV2/100 = (V1 x V2) ÷ 100
variables
12.35 : Function 2 applied factor
=V1/V2x100 = (V1 x 100) x V2 Division of 2 variables
Range: 0.00 to 100.00
-t
6 Factory setting: 0.00
= V1(1 - e 12.35 )
Format: 16 bits
Creation of a linear Depending on its function, the internal variables processing
ramp. 12.35 is used block may require an associated parameter.
7 O= ramp/V1 = ramped V1
to adjust the value
of the ramp parameter is used as a time constant; if it is used to generate
a ramp, this parameter is used to adjust the ramp value
O = abs (V1) = V1 Absolute value (in seconds). The ramp time corresponds to the time for
9 O = V1^12.35 = V112.35 V1 to the power 12.35 parameter.

If the block is used as a power, this parameter is used as
• If 12.30 equals 2, 3, 4 or 5: follows:
When the result of the calculation is greater than or equal to
Function Associated parameter value
12.31
When the result of the calculation is greater than or equal to V12 2.00
12.31 V1
• If 12.30 equals 5: 12.00
To avoid a calculation error if V2 = 0, the result of the operation
will be 0.
12.36 to 12.39 : Not used
To avoid a calculation error, it is the absolute value of the
V1 signal which is taken into account before calculating its
square root or cube root.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
12.45 : Brake apply speed
12.40 : Brake release Range: 0.00 to 100.00 rpm

Used to set the speed threshold at which brake control will
Indicates the state of the brake control output. be disabled. This threshold enables the brake to be applied
Disabled (0): before zero speed so as to avoid load veering while the brake
The brake is applied. is being engaged. If the frequency or speed drops below this
Enabled (1): threshold when no stop request has been made (change of
The brake is released. direction of rotation), brake control will remain activated. This
exception can be used to avoid the brake being applied as the
motor passes through zero speed.
12.41 : Brake controller
Factory setting: Disabled (0) 12.46 : Brake delay
Disabled (0): Format: 16 bits

Brake control is not enabled.
: This time delay is triggered when all the conditions for
Enabled (1): brake release have been met. It allows enough time to
Brake control is enabled. The output is not assigned
automatically; it is up to the user to select the destination for that the slip compensation function has become fully active.
parameter 12.40. When this time delay has elapsed, brake control is enabled
NOTE (12.40 = Enabled (1)).
Enabling brake control imposes a stop on ramp mode 06.01 During the whole of this time delay, the ramp applied to the
= Ramp (1). reference is held constant (02.03 = Yes (1)).
The «catch a spinning motor» function (06.09 = enabled (1))
is not compatible with the brake control function (see 06.09). : This time delay is used to delay the brake apply command
in relation to the passage below the minimum speed threshold
positive speed, and descent with a negative speed. (12.45). It is useful for avoiding repeated oscillation of the
brake when it is being applied around zero speed.
12.42 : Upper current threshold ( )
12.47 : Post-brake release delay
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: 1.00 s

Used to set the current threshold at which the brake will be Format: 16 bits
This time delay is triggered when brake control is enabled. It
at the time the brake is released. is used to allow time for the brake to release before unlocking
the ramp (02.03
12.43 : Lower current threshold
12.48 : Brake apply delay ( )

Used to set the current threshold below which brake control Format: 16 bits
will be disabled. It should be set so that loss of the motor This time delay is used to maintain the torque at standstill
power supply is detected. while the brake is applied. When this time delay has elapsed,
the drive output is deactivated.
12.44 : Brake release speed
Range: 0.00 to 100.00 rpm 12.49 and 12.50 : Not used
Format: 16 bits
Used to set the speed threshold at which the brake will be 12.51 : Forced brake release
provided to drive the load in the right direction when the brake Factory setting: Disabled (0)
is released. In general, this threshold is set at a value slightly
above the motor slip expressed in rpm. When the drive output is active (10.02 = Yes (1)), the brake
Example: control output 12.40 is enabled when the release conditions
determined by the brake control are met. When the drive
- Rated on-load speed = 1470 rpm output is inactive, the brake control output 12.40 is forced to
Enabled (1) if 12.51 is at Enabled (1).
12.51 can be assigned to a digital input but cannot be
written to.
12.52 to 12.60 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
12.67 : Comparator 3 output destination
12.61 : Comparator 3 output Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Disabled (0): assigned by the comparator output.

The input variable is less than or equal to the comparator threshold. Only bit type parameters can be programmed.
Enabled (1): If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the output is not
The input variable is greater than the comparator threshold. sent anywhere.
12.68 : Comparator 3 masking

12.62 : Comparator 3 state before delay

This masking is used, when the threshold type = 1 (under
Indicates the comparator state before the time delay. level), to delay detection when the drive is enabled in order to
avoid detection on starting.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 12.69 : Comparator 3 output delay
Format: 16 bits
This time delay can avoid tripping on a transient event.
parameters can be programmed as the source. 12.70 : Not used
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the input value
equals 0.
12.71 : Comparator 4 output
Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 * Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Factory setting: 0.00 *
Disabled (0):
This parameter is used to set the comparator trip threshold. The input variable is less than or equal to the comparator
The threshold is expressed in the unit (rpm, A, V, etc) of the threshold.
relevant value.
Enabled (1):
The input variable is greater than the comparator threshold.
of the relevant comparator.
12.65 : Comparator 3 hysteresis 12.72 : Comparator 4 state before delay

Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 *
Factory setting: 0.00 * Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
Indicates the comparator state before the time delay.

comparator output will not change state.
The output will change to Enabled (1) when the variable
reaches the value of 12.64 + 12.65/2. The output will change
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
to Disabled (0) when the variable goes below the value of
12.64 - 12.65/2.
Format: 16 bits
12.66 : Comparator 3 level type parameters can be programmed as the source.
Range: Over level (0), Under level (1), Masked under level (2) If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the input value
Factory setting: Over level (0) equals 0.
NOTE
Over level (0):
Output not inverted. underload.
Under level (1):
Output inverted.
Masked under level (2):
Output inverted with masking on drive enable.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
(Underload in kW) 12.81 : Comparator 5 output
Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 *
Factory setting: 0.00 * Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
This parameter is used to set the comparator trip threshold. Disabled (0):
The threshold is expressed in the unit (rpm, A, V, etc) of the The input variable is less than or equal to the comparator
relevant value. threshold.
Enabled (1):
of the relevant comparator. The input variable is greater than the comparator threshold.

Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 * 12.82 : Comparator 5 state before delay
comparator output will not change state. Indicates the comparator state before the time delay.
The output will change to Enabled (1) when the variable
reaches the value of 12.74 + 12.75/2. The output will change 12.83 : Comparator 5 source
to Disabled (0) when the variable goes below the value of Range: 00.00 to 21.51
12.74 - 12.75/2. Factory setting: 05.04
Format: 16 bits
12.76 : Comparator 4 output invert

Range: Over level (0), Under level (1), Masked under level (2)
parameters can be programmed as the source.
Factory setting: Masked under level (2)
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the input value
equals 0.
Over level (0):
NOTE
Under level (1): underspeed.
Output inverted.
Masked under level (2): 12.84 : Comparator 5 threshold
Output inverted with masking on drive enable. Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 *
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 This parameter is used to set the comparator trip threshold.
Factory setting: 00.00 The threshold is expressed in the unit (rpm, A, V, etc) of the
Format: 16 bits relevant value.
assigned by the comparator output. of the relevant comparator.

Only bit type parameters can be programmed.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the output is not 12.85 : Comparator 5 hysteresis
sent anywhere. Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 *
comparator output will not change state.

Format: 16 bits The output will change to Enabled (1) when the variable
This masking is used, when the threshold type = 2 (under reaches the value of 12.84 + 12.85/2. The output will change
level with masking), to delay detection when the drive is to Disabled (0) when the variable goes below the value of
enabled in order to avoid detection on starting. 12.84 - 12.85/2.
12.79 : Comparator 4 output delay of the relevant comparator.

Format: 16 bits
12.80 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
12.86 : Comparator 5 output invert
Range: Over level (0), Under level (1), Masked under level (2)
Factory setting: Masked under level (2)
Over level (0):

Under level (1):
Output inverted.
Masked under level (2):
Output inverted with masking on drive enable.

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits

Only bit type parameters can be programmed.
If an unsuitable parameter is programmed, the output is not
sent anywhere.
Format: 16 bits
This masking is used, when the threshold type = 2 (under
level with masking), to delay detection when the drive is
enabled in order to avoid detection on starting.
12.89 : Comparator 5 output delay

Format: 16 bits

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.14 - MENU 13: Grid management
5.14.1 - Menu 13 presentation
11.31
management 18.70 = Enabled (1). The parameters of this menu are dedicated to the management of grid disturbances by the

13.01 : Grid rated voltage Maximal RMS value (1):
Range: 0 to 1000 V The value displayed in parameter 13.04 is the maximal value
Factory setting: 400 V of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages. This value is
Format: 16 bits updated twice in each electrical period of the grid.
Rated value of the RMS phase-to-phase grid voltage. Minimal RMS value (2):
The value displayed in parameter 13.04 is the minimal value
13.02 : Grid rated frequency of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages. This value is
updated twice in each electrical period of the grid.
Positive sequence value (3):
Format: 16 bits The value displayed in parameter 13.04 is the positive
Rated value of the grid frequency.
milliseconds.
13.03 : Selection of grid voltage measurement for
display
Range: Average RMS value (0), Maximal RMS value (1), 13.04 : Grid voltage
Factory setting: Average RMS value (0)

Format: 16 bits
Selection of the grid voltage measurement displayed in RMS phase-to-phase grid voltage (calculated acccording to
parameter 13.04. the method selected via parameter 13.03).
Average RMS value (0):
The value displayed in parameter 13.04 is the average value 13.05 and 13.06 : Not used
of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages. This value is
updated twice in each electrical period of the grid.
5.14.2.1 - FRT management
U
U REF, FRT
13.34 HVRT Uup,2 threshold
TRIP / ALARM
13.11 LVRT Ulow,1 threshold
TRIP / ALARM
Time
13.21 13.22 13.23 13.31
TFRT,1 time TFRT,2 time TFRT,3 time TFRT,END delay

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
13.07 : “Fault Ride Through” (FRT) management 13.11 to 13.14 : First to fourth voltage threshold
mode of the LVRT pattern
Range: Disabled (0), Enabled. Average RMS value (1),
Enabled. Maximal RMS value (2), 13.11)
13.12)
Enabled. Positive sequence (4) 13.13)
13.14)
Format: 16 bits
Voltage thresholds of the LVRT pattern. Expressed as a
Disabled (0): percentage value of the FRT reference voltage (parameter
The FRT management is disabled. 13.10).
Enabled. Average RMS value (1):
13.15 to 13.20 : Not used
The FRT management is enabled and relies on the average
value of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages.
13.21 to 13.23 : First to third duration of the FRT
Enabled. Maximal RMS value (2): pattern
The FRT management is enabled and relies on the maximal
value of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages. Factory setting: 200 ms (13.21)
Enabled. Minimal RMS value (3): Factory setting: 1600 ms (13.22)
The FRT management is enabled and relies on the minimal Factory setting: 200 ms (13.23)
value of the three RMS phase-to-phase grid voltages. Format: 16 bits
Enabled. Positive sequence (4): Durations of the FRT pattern.
The FRT management is enabled and relies on the positive
sequence value of the grid voltage. 13.24 to 13.30 : Not used
13.31 : FRT exit delay

13.08 : FRT grid voltage
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits FRT exit delay.
Grid voltage used for FRT management (selected via Grid voltage has to remain above the level given by parameter
parameter 13.07). 13.14 during that period to exit LVRT mode and for parameter
13.72 to change from 1 to 0.
13.09 : FRT reference voltage selection Grid voltage has to remain under the level given by parameter
13.36
Average grid voltage over 60 seconds (1) 13.72 to change from 2 to 0.
13.32 : HVRT activation

Selection of the reference voltage used for FRT management.
Specified by parameter 13.01 (0):
The grid voltage reference used for the design of the FRT
13.01.
Average grid voltage over 60 seconds (1): HVRT disabled (0):
The grid voltage reference used for the design of the FRT
HVRT enabled (1):
13.07 and averaged over 60 seconds.
13.33 to 13.36 : First to fourth voltage threshold

13.10 : FRT reference voltage of the HVRT pattern
13.33)
Format: 16 bits 13.34)
Reference voltage used for FRT management (selected via 13.35)
parameter 13.09). 13.36)
Format: 16 bits
percentage value of the FRT reference voltage (parameter

13.10).
13.37 to 13.50 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.14.2.2 - Grid support during FRT
ireactive
in
13.58 Level LVRT i LVRT,3
Voltage thresholds
13.54 13.53 13.52 13.60 13.61 13.62 U

U REF, FRT
Level HVRT i LVRT,1 13.64
13.51 : FRT reactive current reference selection 13.56 to 13.58 : First to third reactive current level
Range: Zero (0) or Average reactive current over 60 seconds of the LVRT grid support pattern
(1)
Factory setting: Zero (0) 13.56)
13.57)
Selection of the reactive current base level to which is 13.58)
Format: 16 bits
parameters 13.52 to 13.66. Reactive current levels of the LVRT grid voltage support
Zero (0): pattern. Expressed as a percentage value of the rated current
(parameter 18.26).
The level of reactive current injected/absorbed to
13.52 to 13.66.
13.59 : Not used
Average reactive current over 60 seconds (1):
13.60 to 13.62 : First to third voltage threshold of
by parameters 13.52 to 13.66, corresponds to the level of the HVRT grid support pattern
reactive current injected to the grid averaged over the last 60
seconds before the activation of the FRT mode. 13.60)
13.61)
13.52 to 13.54 : First to third voltage threshold of 13.62)
the LVRT grid support pattern Format: 16 bits
13.52) Expressed as a percentage value of the FRT reference

13.53) voltage (parameter 13.10).
13.54)
Format: 16 bits 13.63 : Not used
Voltage thresholds of the LVRT grid voltage support pattern.
Expressed as a percentage value of the FRT reference
13.64 to 13.66 : First to third reactive current level
voltage (parameter 13.10).
of the HVRT grid support pattern
13.55 : Not used 13.64)
13.65)
13.66)
Format: 16 bits
pattern. Expressed as a percentage value of the rated current

(parameter 18.26).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
13.67 : Not used
13.68 : Reactive current setpoint ramp in FRT mode
Factory setting: 20 ms
Format: 16 bits
Adjustment of the time to change, in FRT mode, from a
13.69 : Active current limit in FRT mode
Format: 16 bits
Limitation, in percentage of the rated current (parameter
18.26), of the active current injected to the grid.
13.70 and 13.71 : Not used
13.72 : FRT status indicator
This parameter provides information on the grid voltage state.

LVRT : Low grid voltage (1):
HVRT : High grid voltage (2):
voltage.
13.73 : FRT protection mode
This parameter provides the choice of protection mode in

case of grid voltage disturbance.
No additional protection (0):
pattern.
Alarm (1):
An alarm is triggered if the grid voltage is out of the FRT
pattern.
Trip (2):
A trip is triggered if the grid voltage is out of the FRT pattern.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.15 - Menu 14: PID controller
PID
PID reference source invert PID reference slew rate limit
14.03 14.05 14.07
PID PID error
00.00 X-1
reference 1 +
14.22
0
14.20 -
User unit PID
14.62 reference
14.60 in user units
PID feedback source User unit factor
14.04 PID
14.61 14.63 feedback
00.00 X-1 in user units
1
0
14.21
14.06
PID feedback
PID feedback
invert
PID enable
14.08 Gains
PID hold
Drive healthy P 14.10 integrator
I 14.11 14.17
10.01 &
PID option D 14.12
enable 14.13 PID upper limit
source
14.09 14.14 PID lower limit
14.18 PID symmetrical

limit enable
10.01
Scaling X 14.15
PID main PID output
reference source destination
PID output 14.01 14.16
14.02 value
PID main
00.00 reference 00.00
+
14.19
+
14.51 Buffer 1 Points x f(x)
14.52 Buffer 2 1 14.84 14.85

2 14.86 14.87
14.56 One bit buffer 3 14.88 14.89
4 14.90 14.91
Curve function 5 14.92 14.93 Curve function
source 6 14.94 14.95 output destination
7 14.96 14.97 14.82
14.81 f(x) 8 14.98 14.99
Curve function
00.00 output 00.00
x
14.80

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.15.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 14 14.08 : PID enable
Sampling period for PID menu: 6 ms Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
14.01 : PID output value

Disabled (0):
The PID controller is disabled.
Format: 16 bits Enabled (1):
This parameter indicates the level of the PID controller output The PID controller is enabled.
after scaling.
14.09 : PID option enable source
14.02 : PID main reference source Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits This parameter is used to enable the PID controller on a
condition in addition to 14.08.
reference for the PID controller. For the PID controller to be enabled, 14.08, 10.01 and the
All the PID variables are automatically scaled so that these additional condition must be at 1.
Only bit parameters can be assigned.
are unipolar. If an unsuitable parameter is chosen, the input will automatically
take the value 1 to avoid locking the enable output.
14.03 : PID reference source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 14.10 : PID proportional gain
Format: 16 bits
on the PID controller. This is the proportional gain applied to the PID error.
All the PID variables are automatically scaled so that these
(14.01 14.10 14.15 = 1.00.
are unipolar.
14.11 : PID integral gain
14.04 : PID feedback source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits This is the integral gain applied to the PID error.
14.11 of 1.000 the integral
on the PID controller.
All the PID variables are automatically scaled so that these
14.12 : PID derivative gain
are unipolar.
14.05 and 14.06 : PID invert/PID feedback invert Format: 16 bits
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This is the derivative gain applied to the PID error before
Factory setting: Disabled (0) derivation.
These parameters are used to invert the sign of the PID 14.13 : PID upper limit
reference and feedback.
Disabled (0)
Input not inverted. This parameter is used to limit the maximum value of the PID
output (see 14.18).
Enabled (1):
Input inverted.
14.05: PID invert. 14.14 : PID lower limit
14.06: PID feedback invert.
Format: 16 bits
14.07 : PID reference slew rate limit
This parameter is used to limit the maximum negative value
Range: 0.0 to 600.0 s
or the minimum positive value of the PID output.
This parameter is inactive if 14.18 = Enabled (1) (see 14.18).
Format: 16 bits
to
twice as long.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
14.15 : PID output scaling
14.22 : PID error
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to scale the PID output before it is Format: 16 bits
added to the main reference. This parameter indicates the error between the main
The sum of both references is automatically scaled according to reference and the feedback.
the Range of the parameter to which it is addressed.
14.23 to 14.50 : Not used
14.16 : PID output destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
14.51 : Buffer 1
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits
addressed.
This parameter is used to assign an analog input to the PID
Only unprotected non-bit parameters can be assigned.
reference or feedback.
If an unsuitable parameter is assigned, the output will not be
sent to any address.
If the PID output is supposed to affect the speed, it is 14.52 : Buffer 2
advisable to address it to a preset reference.
Format: 16 bits
14.17 : PID hold integrator
This parameter is used to assign an analog input to the PID
feedback or reference.
14.53 to 14.55 : Not used
Disabled (0):
Integration occurs normally when the PID loop is active.
14.56 : Buffer bit
Enabled (1): Range: 0 or 1
The integrator value is frozen and remains at this value until Factory setting: 0
14.17 changes back to Disabled (0).
In both cases, when the PID controller has been disabled, the Binary parameter that can be used as buffer variable.
integrator value is reset to Disabled (0).
14.57 to 14.59 : Not used
14.18 : PID symmetrical limit enable
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) 14.60 : User unit
m /s (7), m /h (9), I/min (10)
When 14.18 is set to Enabled (1), 14.13 and 14.14 take the
same value and 14.13 is the parameter that takes effect.
This parameter selects the unit which will be displayed for
14.19 : PID main reference
14.61 : User unit factor
Range: ± 200.00
Format: 16 bits
This parameter indicates the value of the main reference.
PID reference and PID feedback to be displayed as a user-

14.20 : PID reference
14.62 and 14.63).
Format: 16 bits
14.62 : PID reference in user units
This parameter indicates the value of the PID reference.
Range: ± 20000.00
14.21 : PID feedback
This parameter indicates the value of the PID reference in
user units (scaled using 14.61).
Format: 16 bits
This parameter indicates the value of the PID feedback.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
Description of the function:
14.63 : PID feedback in user units - The function is used to generate a curve from a table of x
abscissa points which has a corresponding table of f(x)
Range: ± 20000.00 ordinate points.
- The points in the table can be in any order.
This parameter indicates the value of the PID feedback in - Between two consecutive abscissa points, the f(x) ordinate
user units (scaled using 14.61). points are interpolated linearly.
Parameters 14.62 and 14.63 must appear in the read menu.
the smallest abscissa point value of parameters 14.84 to
14.64 to 14.79 : Not used 14.98, then 14.80 will equal the ordinate corresponding to the
smallest abscissa point value of parameters 14.84 to 14.98.
14.80 : Curve function output the largest abscissa point value of parameters 14.84 to 14.98,
then 14.80 will equal the ordinate corresponding to the largest
Range: ± 20000.00 abscissa point value of parameters 14.84 to 14.98.
NOTE
This parameter indicates the value of the function output.
format as the assignment parameters.
14.81 : Curve function source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 CAUTION:
Factory setting: 00.00 If the curve does not pass through the (0;0) point, you
Format: 16 bits need to enter all the settings.
to be processed. Only «numerical» parameters can be

assigned. If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of
the variable will be 0.
14.82 : Curve function output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Format: 16 bits
This parameter selects the destination of the variable to be
processed. Only non-protected «non-bit» parameter can be
assigned. If an unsuitable parameter is selected, the value of
the variable taken into account is 0.
14.83 : Not used
14.84 , 14.86 , 14.88 : Abscissas of points

14.90 , 14.92 , 14.94 1 to 8 of the curve function
,
14.96 14.98
Range: ± 20000.00
14.85 , 14.87 , 14.89 : Ordinates of points

14.91 , 14.93 , 14.95 1 to 8 of the curve function
,
14.97 14.99
Range: ± 20000.00
- 14.85 represents the ordinate of abscissa point 14.84.


4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.16 - Menu 15: Fieldbus options
(Please consult the manuals for the corresponding options)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.17 - Menu 16: PLC functions
• Timer relays
Timer
source Timer output
Timer mode Timer destination
16.x2 select unit
16.x9
16.x3 16.x4
Timer
00.00 output 00.00
0 : ON
16.x1
1 : OFF
Timer
value
16.x5
Timer Source Timer type Time delay Unit of time Output state Destination
Timer 1 16.02 16.04 16.01 16.09
Timer 2 16.12 16.14 16.11 16.19
16.22 16.24 16.21 16.29
Timer 4
• Latching relays 1 and 2
Latch output
Latch ON destination
source 16.x9
16.x2
00.00 Latch
output 00.00
ON M
16.x1
M OFF
00.00
16.x3
Latch OFF source
Latching ON source OFF source Output Output destination

LR 1 16.42 16.41 16.49
LR 2

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Latching relays 3 and 4
Latch output
Latch ON destination
source 16.x9
16.x2
Latch
00.00 output 00.00
ON M
16.x1
M OFF
00.00
16.x3
Latch OFF
source
Latching ON source OFF source Output Output destination

16.62 16.61 16.69
LR 4 16.72 16.71 16.79
• Scan timer
Scan timer destination

Scan timer PR1 time 16.81 Scan timer offset
16.95 16.92
Scan timer PR2 time 16.82
Scan timer Scan timer 00.00
Scan timer PR3 time 16.83 output
1
8 2
Scan timer PR4 time 16.84 7 3
16.91
6 4
Scan timer PR5 time 16.85 5
Scan timer PR6 time 16.86

Scan timer PR7 time 16.87 16.80 16.94
Scan timer PR8 time 16.88 Number Scan
of states timer
timed mode
16.93
Scan timer reset

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.17.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 16 16.10 : Not used
16.01 : Timer 1 output 16.11 : Timer 2 output
This parameter indicates the state of the output of timer 1. This parameter indicates the state of the output of timer 2.
16.02 : Timer 1 source 16.12 : Timer 2 source

Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
This parameter is used to select the input source for timer This parameter is used to select the input source for timer
relay 1. relay 2.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these inputs. If Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these inputs. If
an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen
at 0. at 0.
16.03 : Timer 1 mode select 16.13 : Timer 2 mode select
ON timer (0): ON timer (0):

The relay is used for on-delay timing. The output changing to The relay is used for on-delay timing. The output changing to
Enabled (1) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 1. Enabled (1) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 1.
OFF timer (1): OFF timer (1):
The relay is used for off-delay timing. The output changing to The relay is used for off-delay timing. The output changing to
Disabled (0) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 0. Disabled (0) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 0.
NOTE NOTE
Powering-up of the drive is not taken into account as a Powering-up of the drive is not taken into account as a
transition of the input; the timer is therefore not activated. transition of the input; the timer is therefore not activated.
16.04 : Timer 1 unit 16.14 : Timer 2 unit
Factory setting: Second (0) Factory setting: Second (0)
Second (0): Second (0):

The unit of time for the timer relay is the second. The unit of time for the timer relay is the second.
Minute (1): Minute (1):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the minute. The unit of time for the timer relay is the minute.
Hour (2): Hour (2):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the hour. The unit of time for the timer relay is the hour.
16.05 : Timer 1 value 16.15 : Timer 2 value

Range: 0.0 to 60.0 Range: 0.0 to 60.0
This parameter is used to set the delay period for timer 1. The This parameter is used to set the delay period for timer 2. The
unit depends on the setting of 16.04. unit depends on the setting of 16.14.
16.06 to 16.08 : Not used 16.16 to 16.18 : Not used
16.09 : Timer 1 output destination 16.19 : Timer 2 output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
This parameter is used to select the destination of the output This parameter is used to select the destination of the output
for timer 1. for timer 2.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these outputs. Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these outputs.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be
frozen at 0. frozen at 0.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
16.20 : Not used 16.30 : Not used
16.21 : Timer 3 output 16.31 : Timer 4 output

This parameter indicates the state of the output of timer 4.

16.22 : Timer 3 source
16.32 : Timer 4 source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
This parameter is used to select the input source for timer Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the input source for timer
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these inputs. If relay 4.
an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these inputs. If
at 0. an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen
at 0.
16.23 : Timer 3 mode select
16.33 : Timer 4 mode select
ON timer (0):
The relay is used for on-delay timing. The output changing to ON timer (0):
Enabled (1) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 1. The relay is used for on-delay timing. The output changing to
Enabled (1) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 1.
OFF timer (1):
The relay is used for off-delay timing. The output changing to OFF timer (1):
Disabled (0) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 0. The relay is used for off-delay timing. The output changing to
Disabled (0) is delayed in relation to the input changing to 0.
NOTE
Powering-up of the drive is not taken into account as a NOTE
transition of the input; the timer is therefore not activated. Powering-up of the drive is not taken into account as a
transition of the input; the timer is therefore not activated.
16.24 : Timer 3 unit
16.34 : Timer 4 unit
Factory setting: Second (0)
Factory setting: Second (0)
Second (0):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the second. Second (0):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the second.
Minute (1): Minute (1):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the minute. The unit of time for the timer relay is the minute.
Hour (2): Hour (2):
The unit of time for the timer relay is the hour. The unit of time for the timer relay is the hour.
16.25 : Timer 3 value 16.35 : Timer 4 value

Range: 0.0 to 60.0 Range: 0.0 to 60.0
This parameter is used to set the delay period for timer 4. The
unit depends on the setting of 16.24. unit depends on the setting of 16.34.
16.26 to 16.28 : Not used 16.36 to 16.38 : Not used
16.29 : Timer 3 output destination 16.39 : Timer 4 output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Range: 00.00 to 21.51
This parameter is used to select the destination of the output This parameter is used to select the destination of the output
for timer 4.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these outputs. Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to these outputs.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be
frozen at 0. frozen at 0.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
16.40 : Not used 16.53 : Latch 2 OFF source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
16.41 : Latch 1 output
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the disable source for
latching relay 2. A pulse or logic state 1 on the input causes
the output to change to Disabled (0).
This parameter indicates the state of the output of latching relay 1.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an
unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0.
16.42 : Latch 1 ON source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
16.54 to 16.58 : Not used
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the enable source for latching 16.59 : Latch 2 output destination
relay 1. A pulse or logic state 1 on the input causes the output Range: 00.00 to 21.51
to change to Enabled (1). Factory setting: 00.00
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an Format: 16 bits
unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0. This parameter is used to select the destination of the output
of latching relay 2.
16.43 : Latch 1 OFF source Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this output.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
frozen at 0.
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the disable source for 16.60 : Not used
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an 16.61 : Latch 3 output
16.44 to 16.48 : Not used
16.49 : Latch 1 output destination

Range: 00.00 to 21.51 16.62 : Latch 3 ON source
This parameter is used to select the destination of the output Format: 16 bits
of latching relay 1. This parameter is used to select the enable source for latching
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this output.
If an unsuitable parameter is addressed, the output will be to Enabled (1).
frozen at 0. Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an
16.50 : Not used
16.63 : Latch 3 OFF source
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
16.51 : Latch 2 output Factory setting: 00.00
Format: 16 bits
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This parameter is used to select the disable source for
This parameter indicates the state of the output of latching relay 2. the output to change to Disabled (0).
16.52 : Latch 2 ON source unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0.
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Factory setting: 00.00 16.64 to 16.68 : Not used
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the enable source for latching 16.69 : Latch 3 output destination
relay 2. A pulse or logic state 1 on the input causes the output Range: 00.00 to 21.51
to change to Enabled (1). Factory setting: 00.00
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an Format: 16 bits
unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0. This parameter is used to select the destination of the output
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this output.

frozen at 0.
16.70 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
16.83 : Scan timer PR3 time
16.71 : Latch 4 output Range: 0 to 9999 s
This parameter indicates the state of the output of latching relay

4.
Range: 0 to 9999 s
16.72 : Latch 4 ON source Factory setting: 0 s
Range: 00.00 to 21.51 Format: 16 bits
Factory setting: 00.00 Determines how long the scan timer stays at state 4.
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the enable source for
latching relay 4. Only a pulse on the input causes the output
Range: 0 to 9999 s
to change to Enabled (1).
Format: 16 bits
16.73 : Latch 4 OFF source

Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Range: 0 to 9999 s
Format: 16 bits
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used to select the disable source for
Determines how long the scan timer stays at state 6.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this input. If an 16.87 : Scan timer PR7 time
unsuitable parameter is addressed, the input will be frozen at 0. Range: 0 to 9999 s
Format: 16 bits
16.74 to 16.78 : Not used
16.79 : Latch 4 output destination
Range: 00.00 to 21.51
Range: 0 to 9999 s
Factory setting: 00.00 Factory setting: 0 s
This parameter is used to select the destination of the output
of latching relay 4.
Only «bit» type parameters can be assigned to this output. 16.89 and 16.90 : Not used
frozen at 0.
16.91 : Scan timer output
16.80 : Number of states timed
Factory setting: 0
Format: 16 bits
Indicates the scan timer state.
0:
Scan timer disabled. 16.92 : Scan timer destination
1 to 8: Range: 00.00 to 21.51
For example, if 16.80 Format: 16 bits
addressed.
16.81 : Scan timer PR1 time For example, to scan several speeds, choose 01.15 as
Range: 0 to 9999 s destination.
Format: 16 bits 16.93 : Scan timer reset

Range: 0 to 9999 s When this parameter changes to Yes (1), the scan timer is
Factory setting: 0 s reset to 0. In this case, the scan timer returns to state 1. Can
Format: 16 bits be used to control cycle starting via a digital input.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
16.94 : Scan timer mode
Range: 1st state at start order (0),
Always running (including in stop) (1),
Last state at start order (2),
Factory setting: 1st state at start order (0)
1st state at start order (0):

On the run command, the scan timer is initialised on state 1.
Always running (including in stop) (1):
The scan timer runs permanently, even at standstill (1)
Last state at start order (2):
On the run command, the scan timer reverts to the previous
state.
16.95 : Scan timer offset

Range: ± 127
Factory setting: 0
Format: 16 bits
Used to add an offset with the value from the scan timer.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.18 - Menu 17: Diagnostics 17.03 : Power module autotest
Parameters 17.01 to 17.09 are only available on MD2S or
MD2CS units. Factory setting: Yes (1)
17.01 : Control and interface board test

• During this test, current is flowing in the motor.
NOTE
This test consists of checking that the control and interface This self-test is available only for standard POWERDRIVE
boards are working correctly. Before enabling the test: MD2S or MD2CS versions (the drive must control the
- If an external power supply is being used, disconnect the preloading of capacitors on the DC bus, therefore 10.75 must
power module and leave only the supply to the electronics.
- If an internal power supply is being used for the electronics, This self-test is recommended for checking the power
disconnect the internal wiring and connect an external power components on each power-up. It lasts for less than
supply, so as to disconnect the power module and leave only
the electronics supplied with power. (For this connection, the same test as in 17.02.
No (0):
concerned.) The power self-test is not enabled.
All I/O and relays must also be disconnected. The test only Yes (1):
Enabling of the power module test, which will be performed
displayed in parameter 17.05. each time the drive is powered up.
At the end of the test, an automatic reset is carried out To work, the STO inputs must be closed.
(equivalent to the reset when the drive is powered down At the end of the test, if a «Diagnostic» trip appears, read
and then powered up again), in particular a reset to zero the result of the power module test in 17.06, and then get
of parameters 17.33 to 17.39, 17.42 to 17.49, and 17.52 to in touch with your usual Leroy-Somer contact.
17.59).
After the test, reconnect everything.
17.04 : Not used
No (0):
The board test is not enabled.
Yes (1): 17.05 : Control and interface board test result
The board test is enabled.
Range: Processing (0), Passed (1), Error control board (2),
17.02 : Power module test
Processing (0):
The test is in progress. If this state lasts for several seconds,
check that the power module has been disconnected (only
• During this test, current is flowing in the motor.
the electronics should still be supplied with power) and that
NOTE Passed (1):

This test is available only for POWERDRIVE MD2S or The test has been performed successfully, or has not yet
MD2CS versions (the drive must control the preloading of been enabled.
capacitors on the DC bus, therefore 10.75
Error control board (2):
(0)).
A problem has been detected on the control board. The
«Diagnostic» trip is triggered. Check that the conditions given
This test consists of checking that the power circuits are
in 17.01 have been complied with. If so, note the values of
working correctly.
17.08 and 17.09 and get in touch with your usual Leroy-
No (0): Somer contact.
The power test is not enabled.
Error interface board (3):
Yes (1): A problem has been detected on the interface board. The
The power test is enabled. If the bus voltage is higher than «Diagnostic» trip is triggered. Check that the conditions given
70 V, the drive waits for the bus to discharge naturally (this can in 17.01 have been complied with. If so, note the values of
17.08 and 17.09 and get in touch with your usual Leroy-
inputs must be closed. If this is not the case, a «Diagnostic» Somer contact.
trip is generated and the test result 17.06 indicates «Error
None (4):
STO not connected».
At the end of the test, if a «Diagnostic» trip appears, read
the result of the power module test in 17.06, and then get
in touch with your usual Leroy-Somer contact.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
17.06 : Power module test result
Error motor (6),
If 17.03 17.06 and 17.08

17.06 and 17.08.
17.06 17.08 Comment/Description of the problem

Processing (0) - The test is in progress.
Passed (1) - The test has been performed successfully.
A fault is issued by one of the IGBT drivers:
- Short circuit between U and V phases or motor insulation problem,
00014 -
- Faulty IGBT module or IGBT driver Boards
- Ensure U, V and W drive power terminals are not shorted and megger the motor.
Error U phase (2) 00001

Error V phase (3)
Error W phase (4) 00004 - Motor leads not connected properly,
-
- Check motor lead connections or open circuit on motor.
00009
00020
Incorrect reading of the temperature on module U (17.06 = 2); V (17.06
00021
W (17.06 = 4)
00022
DC bus voltage not increasing:
- One Grid phases missing
- Disturbed power grid
00017
- DC BUS preloading circuit faulty
- One or both fuses for measuring the DC bus voltage blown
-
Fast increase of the DC bus voltage:

- DC BUS voltage measurement incorrect
- Disturbed power grid
00011
-
Error rectifier (5) - Megger the motor
-
DC BUS discharge time too long

- Motor insulation issue
00007
- DC bus voltage measurement incorrect
- Megger the motor
-
00019
- Faulty thermal probe
-
Short-circuit between 2 drive output phases.
00012 - Megger the motor
- Check that U, V, W drive power terminals are not shorted
Error motor (6)
00016 Short-circuit between one drive output phase and earth. Megger the motor.
One measure of the motor currents is not correct:

00010
- Current sensor faulty,
00002
Error U and V phase (7) - Cabling issue between the IGBT driver boards and the control board.
Error V and W phase (8)
Master/Interface board malfunction
Error U and W phase (9)
Incorrect reading of the temperature on module U (17.06 = 2); V (17.06
W (17.06 = 4)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
17.06 17.08 Comment/Description of the problem
Error STO not The STO inputs are not active. Check that terminals STO-1 and STO-2 are connected
connected (10) correctly and restart the test.
The test cannot been performed :

- One Mains phase missing
None (15) -
-
-
If a problem persists, read the value of 17.08. Then run a control and interface board test, and note the new values of 17.08 and
17.09 before getting in touch with your usual Leroy-Somer contact.
17.07 : Not used

17.13 : Time between states
17.08 : Error code 1 Range: 0.000 to 6000.000 s
Indicates the time that has elapsed between drive states

Format: 16 bits 17.11 and 17.12. This time is a multiple of 2 ms. If the
An internal code for more accurately determining the parameter displays 6000,000 s, this indicates that the elapsed
problems on the control and interface board or power test. time exceeds the display capacity.
Make a note of this before getting in touch with your usual
Leroy-Somer contact. 17.14 : Not used
17.09 : Error code 2 17.15 : Second fault code for last trip
Format: 16 bits 17.16 : Third fault code for last trip

An internal code for more accurately determining the
problems on the control and interface board test. Make a note
of this before getting in touch with your usual Leroy-Somer 17.17 : Fourth fault code for last trip
contact.
Range: 0 to 999
17.10 : Not used Format: 16 bits
In case of multiple faults recorded simultaneously, the current
trip is displayed in 10.99.
17.11 : Status preceding 17.12 status 17.15, 17.16 and 17.17 indicate the code of the second, third
and fourth faults.
10.98)
This is the drive status before the trip. 17.18 and 17.19 : Counter duration fault - 1
17.18)
17.12 : Status at fault 17.19)
Format: 16 bits
10.98)
This is the drive status at the time of the trip. 17.20 and 17.21 : Counter duration fault - 2
Speed 17.20)
17.21)
Format: 16 bits
Drive trip
17.22 and 17.23 : Counter duration fault - 3
17.13
17.22)
10.98 = 10.98 = 10.98 = 10.98 =
Time 17.23)
Disabled Enabled M Stop on Ramp>M Disabled Format: 16 bits
17.11 17.12 These counters indicate the operating time since the drive

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
17.34 : Maximum U,V,W phase temperature
17.24 and 17.25 : Counter duration fault - 4
Range: 0 to 200°C
17.24) Format: 16 bits
17.25) The maximum of the instant value of 17.42, 17.43 and 17.44
Format: 16 bits equals 0 after a reset (17.29) so long as no run command is
given.
17.26 and 17.27 : Counter duration fault - 5 17.35 : Not used

17.26)
17.27) 17.36 : Time constant
Format: 16 bits
These counters indicate the operating time since the drive
.
NOTE
average values given in 17.37, 17.38, 17.39 and 17.40.
10.24.
17.28 : Not used 17.37 : Average supply voltage
17.29 : Reset of measured maximum Range: 0 to 999 V

Format: 16 bits
by 17.36.
No (0):
Values of parameters 17.30 to 17.34 not reset.
17.38 : Average DC bus
Yes (1):
Values of parameters 17.30 to 17.34 are reset.
Format: 16 bits
17.30 : Maximum supply voltage
by 17.36.
Range: 0 to 999 V
Format: 16 bits : Average motor speed
17.39
The maximum of the average 17.37 equals 0 after a reset
(17.29) so long as no run command is given. Range: ± 60000 rpm
17.36 at the time of the last trip.

17.31 : Minimum supply voltage
Range: 0 to 999 V : Average motor current

17.40
Format: 16 bits
The minimum of the average 17.37 equals 999 after a reset Range: 0 to 2.22 x 11.32
(17.29) so long as no run command is given.
17.36.
17.32 : Maximum motor current
Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32 17.41 : Not used
The maximum of the average 17.40 equals 0 after a reset

(17.29) so long as no run command is given. 17.42 : Average U phase temperature
Range: 0 to 200°C
17.33 : Maximum control board temperature Format: 16 bits
Average temperature of module U at the time of the last drive
Range: 0 to 200°C
Format: 16 bits
The maximum of 17.46 equals 0 after a reset (17.29) so long
as no run command is given.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
17.64 : DC bus and motor current sampling
17.43 : Average V phase temperature Range: 1 to 4
Factory setting: 1
Range: 0 to 200°C
Format: 16 bits
Average temperature of module V at the time of the last drive
17.65 to 17.81 : 17 last values of the DC

17.44 : Average W phase temperature
bus at T0 (trip)
Range: 0 to 200°C
Average temperature of module W at the time of the last drive Fd = Switching frequency
17.65: DC bus value at T0
17.66: DC bus value at T0 - 1 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.45 : Average rectifier bridge temperature 17.68: DC bus value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
Range: 0 to 200°C 17.70: DC bus value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
Format: 16 bits 17.71: DC bus value at T0 - 6 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.73: DC bus value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.46 : Average control board temperature 17.76: DC bus value at T0 - 11 x (17.64 / Fd)
Range: 0 to 200°C 17.78: DC bus value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
Format: 16 bits 17.79: DC bus value at T0 - 14 x (17.64 / Fd)
Average temperature of the control board at the time of the 17.80: DC bus value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.47 : Not used 17.82 : Not used
17.48 to 17.54 : 7 last values of the supply 17.83 to 17.99 : 17 last values of the motor
voltage at trip current at trip
Range: 0 to 999 V Range:0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32
Format: 16 bits
17.48: Supply voltage at T0 (trip) Fd = Switching frequency
17.49: Supply voltage at T0 - 4 ms 17.83: Motor current value at T0 (trip)
17.50: Supply voltage at T0 17.84: Motor current value at T0 - 1 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.51: Supply voltage at T0 - 12 ms 17.85: Motor current value at T0 - 2 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.52: Supply voltage at T0 - 16 ms 17.86: Motor current value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.53: Supply voltage at T0 - 20 ms 17.87: Motor current value at T0 - 4 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.54: Supply voltage at T0 - 24 ms 17.88: Motor current value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.89: Motor current value at T0 - 6 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.55 : Not used 17.90: Motor current value at T0 - 7 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.91: Motor current value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
to : 7 last values of the motor 17.93: Motor current value at T0 - 10 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.56 17.62
speed at trip 17.94: Motor current value at T0 - 11 x (17.64 / Fd)
Range: ± 60000 rpm 17.95: Motor current value at T0 - 12 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.96: Motor current value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.56: Motor speed at T0 (trip) 17.98: Motor current value at T0 17.64 / Fd)
17.57: Motor speed at T0 - 4 ms 17.99: Motor current value at T0 - 16 x (17.64 / Fd)
17.58: Motor speed at T0
17.59: Motor speed at T0 - 12 ms
17.63 : Not used

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.19 - Menu 18: Regen mode
DC bus DC bus voltage

reference
filter User Current demand
drive mode filter
DC bus 18.35 Active
11.31 04.12 reference
voltage
set point - PI current
+ + 4
18.05 +
18.29 +DCbus
+
5
& PWM management

Current control loop
- IDC
Torque
Power offset selection Reactive
feedforward 04.10 final reference
compensation current
Output 0 1
power 18.10 Current +
offset 18.12
05.03 x 18.11 -
Overriding
current limit
Reactive 18.16
Regenerative 18.31
I limit Max. current current Active
18.18 current
management 18.17
Max. inverter
current
VRT Active
Voltage rectifier
dip
management Reactive
current
18.70 management
and Dips
Menu 13 and
swells
Current
Magnitude
Reactive 18.15
reference current
18.45
Tg (φ) x
set point IAC
18.46
-DCbus

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.19.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 18 18.04 : Regen restart mode
A « Low harmonic drive » or a « Regen drive » is a drive
combining two identical inverters: a motor/load inverter and a Factory setting : Synchro x1 (1)
Grid inverter. The « Regen drive » is set via a unique interface
related for the Grid inverter. Synchro x3 (0):

Three attempts to resynchronise. Then, in the event of failure,
the «Mains synchro» trip is generated.
parameters are set to the values shown in the table below
(factory-set, do not change these parameters). Synchro x1 (1):
Only one attempt to synchronise. In the event of failure, the
«Mains synchro» trip is generated immediately.
Pr Parameter names Set to
Without Synchro (2):
Deceleration ramp mode Reserved.
02.04 Fixed ramp (0)
select
08.24 DI4 input destination 18.05 : DC bus voltage set point
08.25
09.04 Logic function 1 source 1 Drive healthy (10.01)
Format: 16 bits
Start order for the
09.06 Logic function 1 source 2
Grid inverter (18.40) by this parameter. The bus voltage must always be greater
Logic function 1 output
09.10 Run forward (06.30) Recommended values:
destination
Mains supply 400 V: 660 V
Grid Inverter for
11.31 User drive mode Mains supply 460 V: 740 V
Regen drive (4)
Communication type Mains supply 690 V: 1070 V
11.66
between drives
17.03 Power module autotest 18.06 : Voltage loop proportional gain
18.07 : Voltage loop integral gain
18.01 : Reactive power 18.06)
0 to 120 (18.07)
18.06)
20 (18.07)
If the parameter is positive, the current is lagging the voltage. Format: 16 bits
If the parameter is negative, the current is leading the voltage. Set proportional and integral gain values.
18.02 : Active power 18.08 : Mains voltage
Range: 0 to 999 V
Format: 16 bits
18.02 represents the inverter power in generator convention. This is the rms voltage at the Regen drive input.
to the mains or the generator and negative power indicates

18.09 : Mains frequency
If this parameter has been assigned to an analog output
via menu 7, 10 V corresponds to the maximum power
Format: 16 bits
Indicates the mains frequency.
18.03 : DC bus voltage 18.10 : Power feed forward compensation

Indicates the DC bus voltage measurement in Regen mode
only. the motor/generator inverter and the grid inverter, the current
reference offset 18.11
of the power 05.03 by -18.10.
If Torque offset selection 04.10 is set to Yes (1), the value
18.11 is added to the current demand issued from the DC bus
voltage regulator allowing an active current compensation to
reduce the transient voltages of the DC bus in the event of
load power impacts.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
18.11 : Current offset NOTE
18.26) Max. drive current = 2.22 x 11.32
Format: 16 bits
18.17 : Reactive current
If 11.31 18.28
Range: ± 2.2 x 11.32
reference of the Grid inverter. Specify a positive reference for
the power to be absorbed from the mains supply to the drive
Reading of the reactive current on the mains supply side: This
current is not directly linked to the load level and is used to
to the mains supply.
- If the parameter is positive, the absorbed current lags the
If 11.31 18.28
supply voltage
is set to Yes (1) and 04.10 is set to Yes (1), this parameter is
- If the parameter is negative, the absorbed current leads the
added to the current demand issued from the DC bus voltage
supply voltage
regulator allowing an active current compensation to reduce
the transient voltages of the DC bus in the event of load power NOTE
impacts. Max. drive current = 2.22 x 11.32.
18.12 : Reactive final reference current 18.18 : Overriding current limit

Reading of the reactive reference current after application of Indication of the rms current limit value of the grid inverter.
compensations. This value depends on 18.19 and limits internal to the drive.
18.13 : Current loop proportional gain 18.19 : Symmetric current limit
The frequency bandwidth of the grid inverter current loop is Format: 16 bits
related to the value of the grid inverter reactor in combination Used to set the maximum permanent current limit permitted
with the 18.13 when both directions: absorbing and returning power.
18.13 increases the frequency See also 18.26 and 18.30.
bandwidth.
18.20 : Input inductance value
18.14 : Current loop integral gain Reserved.
Factory setting: 40
Format: 16 bits 18.21 : Regen healthy
overshoot in response to a step change of current reference Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
is impacted by the value of 04.14. The factory setting covers
most situations. Indicates whether the drive is synchronised with the mains
supply in regenerative mode. In this mode, after a run
18.15 : Current magnitude synchronises with it. Until this synchronisation is achieved,
Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32 parameter changes to «Enabled» and load can be applied to
the DC bus.
Reading of the rms current in each drive input phase. This is
the result of the vectorial sum of the reactive current and the
active current. 18.22 : Binary statuses 10.01 to 10.15 in Regen
NOTE
The Range of 18.15 is limited by the max. drive current (drive
Imax = 2.22 x 11.32). Format: 16 bits
Binary state of parameters 10.01 to 10.15 of the Grid inverter.
A copy of parameter 10.40 of the Grid inverter.
18.16 : Active current
Range: ± 2.2 x 11.32 18.23 : Regen drive status
Reading of the active current absorbed by the drive. The active
power is returned to the mains supply, whilst a positive value A copy of parameter 10.98 of the Grid inverter.
indicates that the drive absorbs the power from the mains supply.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
18.28 : DC bus regulation
18.24 : Regen current trip
Range: 0 to 102
Format: 16 bits
Contains the code for the Grid inverter current trip. See the list No (0):
of trips for parameters 10.20 to 10.29. Value 0 indicates that
the drive has not tripped. The other values indicate the trip as described by 11.31.
number. Yes (1):
18.25 : High stability modulation 18.05.

Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) This selection is dedicated to applications where the inverter
to the grid via reactors or connected to a PM or an induction
generator *.
Disabled (0):
- When Pr 11.31
A standard pulse width modulation is applied to the active
active power is internally managed in order to regulate the
DC bus according to Pr 18.05.
Enabled (1): - If Pr 11.31 is set on 0, 1 or 7, the set point of the motor
Pulse width modulation optimised to minimise the active
torque reference.
18.26 : Regen rated current * The induction generator is driven by a prime mover at a
Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32
Factory setting: According to the drive rating
the induction generator (See 06.09 and 03.91) and executes
Grid drive rated current value. 18.26 can be set up to the a «catch a spinning motor» procedure of the generator.
value IL (maximum line current) which is given in the electrical Pr 11.31 (User Pr 18.28 (DC bus regulation)
characteristics section of the MD2R installation manual. Drive mode) No (0) Yes (1)
18.27 : Regen switching frequency Synchronous
motor: Voltage Reserved
control (0)
Induction motor:
Sets the PWM switching frequency. Voltage control Induction motor in Voltage control
(1)
18.27 Frequency 18.27 Frequency
0 10 Induction motor in
Induction motor:
Flux control with a
1 11 Oriented flux Induction motor
DC bus regulation
2 12 control in Flux control
(2)
current magnitude
4 14 Synchronous or
Synchronous PM motor in Flux
Synchronous
6 16 motor: Oriented control with DC
or PM motor in
7 17 flux control bus regulation
Flux control
(3)
9 19 current magnitude
Grid inverter for
NOTE REGEN drive dedicated for "Low harmonics" or
Refer to the installation guide of Regen drive. For frequencies (4) "Regen" drives
Grid inverter in with line current Active Infeed

current mode (5) magnitude sets converter with
CAUTION: by reference DC-Bus regulation
Do not change the active rectifier switching frequency
when a standard sine filter is used. Voltage current magnitude
Islanded Inverter
controlled in- value
(6)
verter
DC/DC - -
(7)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
18.34 : Not used
18.29 : Active reference current
18.35 : DC bus reference filter
Range: 0 to 10
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: 0
This parameter indicates the current reference for the drive
in Regen mode, coming from the DC voltage regulation when
18.28 is in voltage regulation mode or from the current offset reference, such that:
18.11 when 18.28 is in current control mode. It is expressed time constant = 218.35 ms.
as a percentage of the Regen rated current 18.26. Output via
analog channel or serial link assigned to the current reference
18.36 to 18.39 : Not used
tandem, the master controlling the DC bus voltage, and the
slave controlling the current reference 18.29.
CAUTION: 18.40 : Start order for the Grid inverter
This tandem operation requires the rectifiers to be
connected in a specific manner. Please consult your
usual interlocutor.
Information coming from the motor/load inverter that
authorizes the grid inverter to operate. To use when the start
18.30 : Regenerating I limit enable
order of the Grid inverter is controlled automatically by the
Adjustment rang: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) motor inverter.
Factory setting: Disabled (0) 18.40 = Yes (1) if 01.11
inverter is at Run (1) or 10.02
When the parameter 11.31 load inverter is at Yes (1).
whether or not the regenerating current limit is used .
Regen I
limit enable 18.41 : Inverter healthy
Disabled Enabled
18.30
Active
power
No Yes
18.02
Symmetric
18.19 current limit
Regenerating 18.31
I limit
18.42 : Regen mains alarm
18.31 : Regenerating I limit Information about disappearance of the mains. This

Range: If 11.31 18.26 information can be used by the inverter to manage mains
If 11.31 05.07 supply breaks.
When 18.42 is at «Yes», this information is transmitted to the
Format: 16 bits inverter bridge to archive the delayed stop mode in parameter
If 18.30 = Enabled (1), this parameter is used to limit the 06.03.
11.31= 4) or the
generator (11.31 18.43 : Reactive current selection mode
See also 18.26 and 18.30.
Range: Set by 18.45 (0) or Set by 18.46 (1)
Factory setting: Set by 18.45 (0)
18.32 : Rectifier trip validation
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Set by 18.45 (0):
Factory setting: Enabled (1) The reactive current of the Regen inverter is set directly by
parameter 18.45.
Disabled (0): Set by 18.46 (1):
φ
Enabled (1): inverter is set by the value of parameter 18.46.
If 11.66 = «Regen inverter»
18.44 : Reactive current compensation factor
18.33 : Active rectifier type Format: 16 bits

Used to compensate the reactive current drawn by the mains
Format: 16 bits
Reserved.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
18.45 : Reactive reference current
18.61 : DC bus < Vmin
18.26)
Reserved.
Format: 16 bits
This parameter is used as the reactive current reference. With a
value of zero, the input power factor is around 1. A value not equal 18.62 : Simulated resistance
to zero enables reactive current to be absorbed or produced: Reserved.
- If the parameter is positive, the absorbed current will lag the
supply voltage 18.63 : Filtering capacitance (low voltage side)
- If the parameter is negative, the absorbed current will lead Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 mF
the supply voltage Factory setting: 1.0 mF
18.46 : Tg (φ) set point Reserved.

Range: -20.000 to 20.000
Factory setting: 0 18.64 : Total DC bus capacitance
Format: 16 bits Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 mF
Depending on the value selected in 18.43, the value of 18.46 Factory setting: 10.0 mF
acts as the Tg reference ( ) at the Regen drive input bridge.
Reserved.
18.47 to 18.49 : Not used
18.65 to 18.69 : Not used
18.50 : Regulated voltage selector
Reserved. 18.70 : Voltage dip management
18.51 : Output charge/discharge
Reserved.
Disabled (0):
18.52 : Output voltage (Vout) managed in accordance with the description in the table
Reserved. used to reduce the level of harmonics drawn from the mains.
18.53 : Output voltage set point State of 06.03 at State of 06.03 at Comments
Reserved. inverter end active rectifier
end
18.54 : Output voltage max Disabled (0)
Reserved.
Disabled (0)
Stop (1) or See 06.03 when
18.55 : Output voltage min Delayed stop (2) at Disabled (0)
Reserved.
Disabled (0)
18.56 : DC bus max Stop (1) or
Reserved. See 06.03 when
Delayed stop (2) Stop (1) or De-
at Stop (1) and
layed stop (2)
Delayed stop (2)
18.57 : DC bus min
Reserved.
Enabled (1):
18.58 : Vout > Vmax 18.71. If the dip lasts longer than
18.73
Reserved.
be selected when the drive converts energy from a generator
to inject it onto the mains supply.
18.59 : Vout < Vmin
18.71 to 18.74 : Not used
Reserved.
18.75 : PTI/PTO mode selector
Range: Classic (0), PTI (1), PTO (2)
18.60 : DC bus > Vmax Factory setting: Classic (0)
Reserved. Energy management mode selector, as follows.

Classic (0):
Classic working mode.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
PTI (1): 18.84 : Synchronisation loop integral gain
18.79, 18.80 Range: 0 to 10000
and 18.81 are used to ajust the limit of power consumed by Factory setting: 100
the motor inverter. Enabling this mode does not affect the Format: 16 bits
Integral gain of the control loop used to synchronize the slave
PTO (2): AIC with the master AIC.
18.79,
18.80 and 18.81 are used to ajust the limit of power produced 18.85 : Balancing loop integral gain
by the motor inverter. Enabling this mode does not affect the Range: 0 to 10000
Format: 16 bits
: PTI, PTO or island PTO status Integral gain of the control loop used to balance the voltage of
18.76
the slave AIC with the one of the master AIC.
18.86 : Short-circuit current set point
depends on parameters 18.75 and 18.28.

Format: 16 bits
18.77 : Power setpoint in PTO mode 18.26.
18.87 : Short-circuit protection loop proportional gain

Format: 16 bits Range: 0 to 10000
Motor power set point in PTO mode. Expressed as a Factory setting: 100
percentage of rated power, √ 05.09 x 05.07. Format: 16 bits
Short-circuit protection loop proportional gain.
18.78 : Active power production limit in PTO mode
18.88 : Short-circuit protection loop integral gain
Range: 0 to 10000
Format: 16 bits Factory setting: 100
Active power production limit in PTO mode as a percentage of Format: 16 bits
rated power, √ 05.09 x 05.07. Short-circuit protection loop integral gain.
18.79 : Active power consumption limit in PTI mode 18.89 : Short-circuit controller output slew-rate
Range: 1.00 to 100.00
Active power consumption limit in PTI mode as a percentage Short-circuit controller output slew-rate. Duration for which
of rated power √ 05.09 x 05.07. the short-circuit controller output changes from -13.01 to zero.
18.80 : Enable power limitation mode 18.90 : Current magnitude filter coefficient
Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1) Range: 0.1 to 1000.0
Factory setting: Disabled (0) Factory setting: 10.0
Format: 16 bits
Enabling of a priority limit of power consumption in PTI mode.
of short-circuits occurring on the islanded grid.
18.81 : Active power priority limit when 18.80 is set to 1
18.91 : Active power average value
Format: 16 bits
Priority limit of active power consumption in PTI mode as a Format: 16 bits
percentage of rated power, √ 05.09 x 05.07.
the slave AIC and master AIC.
18.82 : Master/slave status
Range: Slave (0) or Master (1) 18.92 : Reactive power average value
Factory setting: Slave (0)
Format: 16 bits
18.83 : Synchronization loop proportional gain the slave AIC and master AIC.
Range: 0 to 10000
Factory setting: 100 18.93 : Island grid rated power (kW)
Format: 16 bits Range: 0 to 10000 kW
Proportional gain of the control loop used to synchronize the Factory setting: 0
slave AIC with the master AIC. Format: 16 bits

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
18.94 : Active power
Format: 16 bits
AIC. Expressed as a percentage of Pr 18.93.
18.95 : Reactive power
Format: 16 bits
AIC. Expressed as a percentage of Pr 18.93.
18.96 : Available active power
Format: 16 bits
Pr 18.93.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.20 - Menu 19: Additional I/O options
Refer to the manual for the corresponding option.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.21 - Menu 20: Specific applications
Emergency operation
DIx input
Digital input x invert destination
08.1x 08.2x
Emergency run selection Takes control of

Digital 1
input DIx DIx 20.01 run commands
and disables trips
0
OR
20.02
DIy input
destination Trip
inhibition
08.2y
Emergency run
remote/local
reference
20.03
DIy
&
OR
07.28
Current loop Emergency run
loss on inputs speed reference
AI2 and AI3
07.29
20.09
0
Menu 1 B
B’ Menu 1
DIz input
destination 08.2z 1
Emergency run
local speed
reference selector
DIz 20.04
Emergency run speed

reference 1
20.05
0
Emergency run speed

reference 2 1
20.06
20.15 to 20.19 5 last masked trips
Backspin and Kick start
20.30 Backspin management 20.43 Kick start main speed ref

20.40 Kick start enable 20.44 Reference running time
20.41 Kick start speed ref 1 20.45 Acceleration/deceleration ramp
20.42 Kick start speed ref 2

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.21.2 - Explanation of parameters in menu 20 20.04 : Emergency run local speed reference selector
20.01 : Emergency run selection
Ref. 1 (20.05) (0):

The emergency run mode speed reference equals 20.05.
No (0): Ref. 2 (20.06) (1):
In emergency run mode speed reference equals 20.06.
Yes (1):
Emergency run mode is enabled. CAUTION:
The 07.28 and 07.29 parameters «4/20 mA current loop»
NOTE are always displayed even when AI2 is set to «4/20 mA
If 20.01 is at Yes, digital inputs are forced to positive logic without detection» (factory setting).
(08.29 = Positive). If input AI2 is not used, set 07.11 to 0/20 mA.
When 20.01 is at Yes (1), and the STO1 and STO2 inputs are
20.05 : Emergency run speed reference 1
closed, the drive operates in emergency run mode.
It is advisable to use an inverted digital input as source for Range: ± 01.06
20.01 so that in the event of accidental opening 20.01 Factory setting: 0.00 rpm
switches to 1 and activates emergency operation.
Emergency run speed reference.
In emergency run mode:
- The drive starts in forward only at the speed selected by 20.06 : Emergency run speed reference 2
parameters 20.03 and 20.04 Range: ± 01.06
- 06.43 are Factory setting: 0.00 rpm
ignored.
- The drive enable parameter 06.15 is ignored. Emergency run speed reference.
- The power diagnostic sequences are not performed.
- The drive ignores all commands from the keypad. 20.07 and 20.08 : Not used
- Trips relating to the software are disabled, but alarm 10 is
active to indicate their presence.
- The other trips are reset automatically, independently of 20.09 : Emergency run speed reference
10.80 (no limiting by 10.34).
- Catch a spinning motor mode is activated independently of Range: ± 01.06
06.09 and remains enabled for future operations.
- Autotuning is not performed on the run command. Emergency run speed reference taken into account.
20.02 : Trip inhibition • Keypad control (06.43 = LCD keypad) is not

suitable for emergency run mode.
20.10 to 20.14 : Not used

No (0):
Yes (1): 20.15 to 20.19 : 5 last masked trips

Software trips (see list in 20.15) are not taken into account
but alarm 10 is active to indicate their presence. Other trips Range: 0 to 102 (see 10.20)
are reset automatically independently of 10.80 (no limiting by
10.34)
account by emergency run mode.
20.03 : Emergency run remote/local reference 20.15 Indicates the most recent trip
Range: Remote (menu 1) (0) or Local (menu 20) (1) 20.19 Indicates the oldest trip
Factory setting: Remote (menu 1) (0) The trips that are disabled in emergency operation are:
No. Name Reason for trip
Remote (menu 1) (0):
The drive speed reference is equal to the reference for item B Braking IGBT transistor overcurrent
4 Brak. IGBT
in menu 1. If a 4-20 mA trip is detected on one of analog inputs for the POWERDRIVE MD2
20.04. Motor current imbalance:
Local (menu 20) (1):
20.05 if not zero
20.04 is at 0 or by parameter 20.06 if 20.04 is at 1. The drive overload level exceeds the
Drive
overload Ixt
the installation manual
RECTIFIER
10
Th high

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
No. Name Reason for trip No. Name Reason for trip
Braking resistor overload I x t: 10.39 101 Loss of AC supply
19 Brak. resist.
21 Th IGBT U Overheating of phase U IGBTs

102 by the serial link to the Regen inverter
Opening of the DI1/PTC input of the (see 11.66).
24 Motor PTC drive PX1 terminal block or T1/T2
20.20 to 20.29 : Not used
Loss of the current reference on ana-
AI2 loss
log input AI2
20.30 : Backspin management
Loss of the current reference on input Range: Disabled (0) or Enabled (1)
29
Loss of communication on the P2
COM loss When this function is enabled, the drive harnesses the
connector serial link
Fieldbus loss types (eg: Progressive Cavity Pumps), to extend the possible
operation or timing error
operating time without the mains. Depending on the system
Encoder One of the encoder feedback data status when the mains supply disappears, the drive can
signal loss items is missing therefore operate for a few minutes rather than a few seconds
with just the load’s kinetic energy.
Encoder The control board fails to
40 If the mains supply returns before the time set in 06.62
board communicate with the encoder board
User trip 1 triggered by state 1 of drive reaccelerates the motor up to the reference speed.
41 User 1
10.61. Otherwise, a mains loss trip is generated.
User trip 2 triggered by state 1 of
42 User 2
10.63. 20.31 : Backspin speed
Reserved.
10.65.
20.32 : Not used
User trip 4 triggered by state 1 of
44 User 4
10.67.
20.33 : Backspin torque
Reserved.
10.38
User trip 6 triggered by the serial link 20.34 : Backspin threshold
46 User 6
10.38 = 46 Reserved.
User trip 7 triggered by the serial link
47 User 7
10.38 = 47 20.35 to 20.39 : Not used
10.38
49 User 9
10.38 = 49
User 10
10.38
• Overheating of phase V IGBTs
Th IGBT V
• Load too high
• Overheating of phase W IGBTs
Th IGBT W
• Load too high
The DO1 output load current is >
66 DO1 over ld
200 mA
The current has exceeded the limit
Motor
programmed in 05.55. The load is too
overcurrent
high for the setting.
AI4 loss on Loss of the current reference on
70 analog input AI4 of the MDX-IO option
MDX-IO
Loss of the current reference on
71
MDX-IO
The grid voltage has dropped below
LVRT
The grid voltage has exceeded the

79

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
20.40 : Kick start enable
Factory setting: 0
The purpose of the Kick start function is to unblock a clogged

pump by oscillating the drive speed reference.
CAUTION:
This operation can damage the motor.
Disabled (0):
Function disabled.
Enabled (1):
On the next run command, the intensive pump unblocking
sequence will be initiated.
Motor speed
20.45 20.45 20.45
20.42
20.41
20.43
Time
-20.41
-20.42
20.44 20.44 20.44 20.44 20.44
20.41 : Kick start speed ref 1

Range: ± 01.06
Factory setting: 0
20.42 : Kick start speed ref 2

Range: ± 01.06
Factory setting: 0
20.43 : Kick start main speed ref

Range: ± 01.06
Factory setting: 0
Final reference used in Kick start.
20.44 : Reference running time

Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s
Format: 16 bits
Used to set the time between each reference.
20.45 : Acceleration/deceleration ramp
Format: 16 bits
Used to set the ramps for each reference.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
5.22 - Menu 21: Second motor map 21.04 : Motor 2 acceleration rate 1
Refer to parameter 11.45 for the motor selection. *
Format: 16 bits
21.01 : Motor 2 maximum speed
Sets the time for acceleration from 0 to 1000 rpm *.
Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm
t(s) x 1000 min-1
21.04 =
(N2 - N1) min-1
N (min-1)
• Before setting the maximum limit, check that the
motor and the driven machine can withstand it. 1000
N2
of rotation.
This parameter is equivalent to 01.06 in motor 1.
N1
21.02 : Motor 2 minimum speed
Range: 0.00 to 21.01 rpm 0 t (s)
t
Value of 21.04
CAUTION: This parameter is equivalent to 02.11 in motor 1.

This parameter is inactive during jog operation. * NOTE
This parameter is equivalent to 01.07 in motor 1. The reference speed can be changed from 1000 to 100 min-1
in parameter 02.56. This makes it possible to multiply the
21.03 : Motor 2 reference selected acceleration and deceleration times by 10.
Range: Terminal inputs (0), Analog input 1 (1),
21.05 : Motor 2 deceleration rate 1
Factory setting: Terminal inputs (0) *
Terminal inputs (0): Format: 16 bits
The speed reference is selected by combining the digital Sets the time for deceleration from 1000 rpm * to 0.
inputs assigned to parameters 01.41 and 01.42.
Analog input 1 (1): t(s) x 1000 min-1
21.05 =
The speed reference comes from differential analog input 1 (N2 - N1) min-1
(AI1+, AI1-).
Analog input 2 (2): N (min-1)
1000
(AI2+, AI2-).
N2
Preset reference (3):
The speed reference comes from the preset references (RP1
Keypad (4): N1
The speed reference comes from the parameter-setting
interface (see section2.2.4). 0 t
t (s)
Value of 21.05

* NOTE
The reference speed can be changed from 1000 to 100 min-
1
in parameter 02.56. This makes it possible to multiply the
21.06 : Motor 2 rated frequency
This is the point at which motor operation changes from

constant torque to constant power.
In standard operation, it is the frequency indicated on the
motor nameplate.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
21.07 : Motor 2 rated current Number of poles 21.11
Range: 0.00 to 2.2 x 11.32 12 12 Poles (6)
Factory setting: 0.00 A 14 14 Poles (7)
16
This is the value of the motor rated current indicated on the
nameplate. Above this value the motor is overloaded. This parameter is equivalent to 05.11 in motor 1.
21.12 : Motor 2 stator resistance
21.08 : Motor 2 rated speed
Range: 0.00 to 60000.00 rpm
This is the on-load speed of the motor indicated on the nameplate. vector control mode (see parameter 05.14).
This parameter is equivalent to 05.08 in motor 1. If the stator resistance cannot be measured (motor not
connected, value higher than the max. rating) a «Stator
resistance» trip occurs.
21.09 : Motor 2 rated voltage
During autotuning (05.12 = Stationary (1) or Rotating (2)), the
Range: 0 to 999 V
value of the stator resistance is stored automatically in 21.12.
Factory setting: 400 V
Format: 16 bits
Output voltage 21.13 : Motor 2 voltage offset
21.09 Output voltage
characteristic for a
boost of less than 6.25% Factory setting: 0.0 V
Format: 16 bits
21.09 This voltage offset is measured by the drive (see parameter
2
05.14). It is used to correct imperfections in the drive,
especially voltage drops in the IGBTs and idle times. This
Boost parameter has an important role in low-speed operation, i.e.
* Output
21.06 21.06 frequency when the drive output voltage is low.
2 During autotuning (05.12 = Stationary (1) or Rotating (2)), the
value of the voltage offset is stored automatically.
05.14 = Linear V/F law with This parameter is equivalent to 05.23 in motor 1.
set via 05.15. 21.14 : Motor 2 d-axis inductance / Leakage ind

21.10 : Motor 2 power factor

Range: 0.00 to 1.00 - Induction motor: Value of the overall leakage inductance
applied to the typical machine stator. The value of 21.14 is
stored automatically during an autotune when running in
The power factor is measured automatically during an 05.12 = Rotating: incomplete motor data
autotune phase in level 2 (see 05.12) and set in this (2)).
parameter. If it has not been possible to carry out the autotune - Synchronous motor: Value of the typical machine cyclical
φ stator inductance. The value of 21.14 is used for PM or
nameplate. PMASR motors with sensorless control mode (03.38
This parameter is equivalent to 05.10 in motor 1. 9). Its value should be entered from the nameplate data, or
else using the autotune procedure (see 05.12).
21.11 : Motor 2 number of poles This parameter is equivalent to 05.24 in motor 1.
21.15 : Motor 2 map enable

Factory setting : Automatic calculation (0):
When this parameter is at Automatic (0), the drive
automatically calculates the number of poles according to 21.15 changes from 0 to 1 when the motor 2 parameters
the rated speed (21.08) and the rated frequency (21.06). are active. They are taken into account when 11.45 is set to
Motor 2 (1).
of poles.
Number of poles 21.11 21.16 to 21.23 : Not used
2 2 Poles (1)
4 4 Poles (2)
6
10

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
21.24 : Motor 2 stator inductance LS ( )
- Induction motor: sum of the magnetising inductance and
The value of 05.24 is stored automatically during an autotune

when running (05.12: Rotating: incomplete motor data (2)).
- Synchronous motor: This parameter is not relevant with a
synchronous motor.
21.25 to 21.29 : Not used
21.30 : Motor 2 volt per 1000 rpm (Ke) ( )

Range: 0 to 10000 V
Format: 16 bits
The value of 21.30 is used in synchronous motor sensorless
control mode (03.38
preferably from the nameplate data or else using the autotune
procedure.
21.31 to 21.50 : Not used
21.51 : Q axis inductance motor 2

(synchronous motor) ( )
21.14
Format: 16 bits
Used to set an inductance value in quadrature with the pole
axis for synchronous motors with saliency.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
6 - OPERATION WITH MODBUS RTU 6.1.4 - Networking
The POWERDRIVE serial port allows the drive to communicate
6.1 - Serial link
The POWERDRIVE incorporates as standard a non-isolated The network should therefore be connected in a «daisy-
serial link port accessible with a connector. chain» (not a star).
For users who wish to keep the parameter-setting interface
permanently connected, it is then necessary to add the MDX- 6.2 - Parameter setting using the PC
MODBUS option with an isolated 2 or 4-wire serial link port.
For further details, please refer to the MDX-MODBUS manual With the MDX-SOFT parameter-setting software, setting up
the POWERDRIVE from a PC is very user-friendly.
6.1.1 - Location and connection

6.3 - Control word and status word
POWERDRIVE run commands can be managed using a
single parameter 06.42, called the «control word».
This is because the value of 06.42 corresponds to a word in
which each bit is associated with a command. The command is
enabled when the bit is at 1, and disabled when the bit is at 0.
To enable commands using the control word, set 06.43 = 1
(run commands via the terminals are no longer active), when
the drive is disabled.
Parameter 10.40, called the status word, is used to group

together information about the drive. The value of 10.40
Connector for a drive status parameter.

MODBUS RTU
P1 P2 Px1 Px2 Px3
6.4 - MODBUS RTU
6.4.1 - General
The MODBUS RTU protocol is a master-slave type protocol
(a single master per network).
Description Characteristics
multi-drop operation
Standard UART asynchro-
Terminals Description Bit stream -
1 0V
2 Rx\, Tx\ Each symbol consists of:
Rx, Tx 1 start bit
4 24V
Symbol
6.1.2 - Protocols
The drive handles the following protocols: 1 or 2 stop bits according to
- MODBUS RTU 11.27
The drive automatically recognises the protocol used, and Baud rate
this can be read in 11.24 «Serial mode». bauds
6.1.3 - Parameter setting 6.4.2 - Description of exchanges

Depending on the application, the following parameters need Exchanges are initiated by the master, which sends its
request: if the slave concerned has understood it, it sends its
11.23: Serial address response. Each frame (question or response) contains four
11.25: Baud rate types of data:
11.27: Parity type, number of stop bits - The address of the slave concerned which receives the
For more information on these parameters, refer to menu 11, question frame (master request) or the address of the slave
which sends the response frame (encoded in one byte)
- The function code which selects a command (read or write
words, bits etc) for question and response frames (encoded
in one byte)

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
6.4.5 - Function codes
command (encoded in «n» bytes)
The function code determines the context and format of the
- The frame CRC, calculated over sixteen bits, which is used
message data.
to detect transmission errors.
The frame is terminated with a minimum silence period, Function code
Description
Decimal Hexadecimal
at 19200 baud, the silence period must be at least 1/19200 Read multiple 16-bit registers or
words
Write single 16-bit register or
end of the message, and the slave can start to process the 6 0x06
word
transmitted data. Write multiple 16-bit registers or
All data is encoded in hexadecimal format. 16 0x10
words
Slave Function CRC Silence Read and write multiple 16-bit
Message data 0x17
address code 16 bits interval registers or words
All master requests will lead to a response from a single slave. • Function code 3: Read multiple
The slave will respond within the maximum allotted time (the Reads a contiguous array of registers. The slave imposes an
minimum response time is never less than the silence period). upper limit on the number of registers which can be read. If
See diagram below. the limit is exceeded, the slave does not respond.
NOTE
Slave response time 99 parameters maximum can be read.
Minimum silence period
Frame sent by the Master:
Frame Bytes Description
Request from detection Frame processed 0 Slave address (1 to 247)
Master by the slave 1
2 Start word address MS byte
Start word address LS byte
Minimum silence period 4
Slave Request from 6 CRC LS byte

response Master 7 CRC MS byte
slave n
6.4.3 - Parameter mapping Command (03)
POWERDRIVE menu. Start word address
1 hexadecimal
parameter notation. byte Number of words
The «menu» and «parameter» indices can take the values 2 hexadecimal CRC
0 to 99. Menu.parameter is assigned to a MODBUS bytes
RTU register menu x 100 + 16-bit parameters for 16-bit
Frame returned by the slave:

Bytes Description
be addressed in the same way as 16-bit. 0 Slave address
1
In order to map the parameters correctly, the slave 2
increments (+1) the address of the received register. Word 0 MS byte
Example: X = menu; Y = paramete 4 Word 0 LS byte
Word 1 MS byte
Register address 6 Word 1 LS byte
Drive parameter
(protocol level) ... …
(X x 100) + Y -1 n CRC LS byte
n+1 CRC MS byte
Examples
01.01 (32-bit) 16484
01.09 (8-bit but treated slave n
108
as 16-bit Command (03)
07.03 (16-bit) X.Y in 16-bit
No. of bytes
Word number 0
6.4.4 - Data encoding 1 hexadecimal byte
Word number 1
MODBUS RTU uses a «big-endian» representation for the …
addresses and data items (except for the CRC which is «little- 2 hexadecimal bytes CRC
endian»). This means that, when a numerical quantity «bigger»
For example:
1st 2nd …
16 – bits would be: 0x12

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
• Function code 6: Write single register Frame returned by the slave:
Writes a value to a single 16-bit register. The normal response Bytes Description
is an echo of the request, returned after the register contents 0 Slave address (1 to 247)
have been written. 1 Function code 0x10
2 Start word address MS byte
Frame sent by the master: Start word address LS byte
Bytes Description 4
0 Slave address (0 to 247)
1 Function code 0x06 6 CRC LS byte
2 Register address MS byte 7 CRC MS byte
Register address LS byte
4 Register value MS byte slave n
Register value LS byte Command (10h)
6 CRC LS byte 1 hexadecimal byte Start word address
7 CRC MS byte Number of words
2 hexadecimal bytes CRC
slave n
Command (06) • Function code 23: Read/write
Register address Writes and reads two contiguous arrays of registers. The slave
1 hexadecimal byte Register value imposes an upper limit on the number of registers which can
CRC be written. If the limit is exceeded, the slave does not respond.
2 hexadecimal bytes NOTE
99 parameters maximum can be read and 10 parameters
Frame sent by the slave: maximum can be written.
Bytes Description
0 Slave address Frame sent by the Master:
1 Function code 0x06 Bytes Description
2 Register address MS byte 0 Slave address (1 to 247)
Register address LS byte 1 Function code 0x17
4 Register data MS byte 2 Start word to be read address MS byte
Register data LS byte Start word to be read address LS byte
6 CRC LS byte 4
7 CRC MS byte
6 Start word to be written address MS byte
• Function code 16: Write multiple 7 Start word to be written address LS byte
Writes a contiguous array of registers. The slave imposes an
upper limit on the number of registers which can be written. If 9
the limit is exceeded, the slave does not respond. 10
NOTE 11 Word 0 MS byte
12 parameters maximum can be written. 12 Word 0 LS byte
Word 1 MS byte
14 Word 1 LS byte
Frame sent by the Master: ... …
Bytes Description n CRC LS byte
0 Slave address (1 to 247) n+1 CRC MS byte
1 Function code 0x10
2 Start word address MS byte Where n = 11 + number of bytes to be written.
Start word address LS byte Frame returned by the slave:
4 Bytes Description
0 Slave address (1 to 247)
6 1 Function code 0x17
7 Word 0 to be written MS byte 2
Word 0 to be written LS byte Word 0 MS byte
9 Word 1 to be written MS byte 4 Word 0 LS byte
10 Word 1 to be written LS byte Word 1 MS byte
... … 6 Word 1 LS byte
n CRC LS byte ... …
n+1 CRC MS byte n CRC LS byte
n+1 CRC MS byte
Where n = 7 + number of bytes in write block.
slave n
Command (10h)
Start word address
1 hexadecimal byte
Number of words
No. of bytes
2 hexadecimal bytes Word number 0
1 hexadecimal byte Word number 1
2 hexadecimal bytes …
CRC

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
6.4.6 - Example Algorithm:
START
Drive address = 1 (Default address).
CRC = 0xFFFF
1.05.
1.05 becomes 1.04
(Modbus address = drive parameter address - 1).
REPEAT
{
• Request
Byte to be processed = next byte;
Example CRC = CRC XOR byte to be
RTU (binary) processed
(hex)
REPEAT eight times
Slave address 1 0000 0001 {
Function 0000 0011 IF (CRC odd) then
Start word or register CRC = CRC/2 XOR
00 0000 0000
address (MS byte) 0xA001
else
Start word or register
0110 1000 CRC = CRC/2
address (LS byte)
}
00 0000 0000
registers (MSB) bytes processed + 1
}
0000 0011
registers (LSB)
CRC check: LS byte 1000 0100
MS byte 17 0001 0111
Total bytes:
• Response
Example
RTU (binary)
(hex)
Slave address 1 0000 0001
Function 0000 0011
06 0000 0110
Word or register 0 (MS byte) 00 0000 0000
Word or register 0 (LS byte) 2D 0010 1101
Word or register 1 (MS byte) 0000 0101
Word or register 1 (LS byte) DC 1101 1100
Word or register 2 (MS byte) 00 0000 0000
Word or register 2 (LS byte) 00 0000 0000
CRC check: LS byte 4C 0100 1100
MS byte 0100 0101
Total bytes 11
6.4.7 - Wait time

In MODBUS RTU, when the master sends a message to a
slave, it imposes a wait time between the end of its request
and the start of the response from the slave, which makes it
possible to detect any missing response.
6.4.8 - Exceptions
If the message is incorrect and the frame is not received, or
if the CRC trips, the slave will not produce an exception, and
in this case the master will not receive a response from the
exceeds the maximum size accepted by the slave, then the
and the master will not receive a response.
6.4.9 - CRC
This check word is used to detect transmission errors. It is
calculated over 16 bits from all the bytes in the question and
response frames.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
7 - TRIPS - DIAGNOSTICS LED
Value Name Meaning
7.1 - Warning Code
Stop on ramp /
RAMP STOP >M
The user must not attempt to repair the drive clockwise / motor
himself, nor perform diagnostics other than Stop on ramp /
those listed in this section. If the drive 4 RAMP STOP >G
clockwise / generator
malfunctions, it should be returned to LEROY-SOMER
via your usual contact. RAMP STOP <M Stop on ramp / counter-
clockwise / motor
6 RAMP STOP <G Stop on ramp / counter-

7.2 - Drive status clockwise / generator
The parameter 10.98 Stop by low-frequency

7 TLSP STOP >M current injection /
When the drive is not in the trip or alarm state, the two digits clockwise / motor
on the control board provide information about the drive
status when stopped or running. Stop by low-frequency
TLSP STOP >G current injection /
The LEDs display alternately a 2-letter code and a number clockwise / generator
below (this number corresponds to the value of parameter Stop by low-frequency

9 TLSP STOP <M current injection / coun-
10.98). ter-clockwise, motor
Stop by low-frequency
10 TLSP STOP <G current injection / coun-
OP : "Operating" ter-clockwise, generator
St
St : "Stop"
Lt : "Limit" DC Inject.>M DC injection / clockwise,
motor
rd : "Ready"
16 DC Inject.>G DC injection / clockwise,
tr : "Trip" (see section 7.4) generator
Fr : Fire (emergency operation) 17 DC Inject.<M DC injection / counter-
re : "Regen" clockwise, motor
DC Inject.<G DC injection / counter-

clockwise / generator
LED
Value Name Meaning Indexed stop
Code 11 Clockwise / motor
0 DISABLED Disabled
12 Indexed stop
Clockwise / generator
Drive disabled with run
command present, but Indexed stop
STO-1 and STO-2 not Counter-clockwise /
connected or 06.15 motor
Drive output set to
Indexed stop
«Disabled» 14 Counter-clockwise /
Ext. DISABLE generator
Depending
on the control Current limit / clockwise
19 I LIMIT >M
logic selected / motor
in 06.04, the motor Current limit / clockwise
20 I LIMIT >G
can start as soon as / generator
the drive is enabled. Current limit / counter-
21 I LIMIT <M clockwise / motor
Enabled / motor (on 22 I LIMIT <G Current limit / counter-
1 clockwise / generator
load)
Enabled / generator Lt BUS voltage limit /
2 DC BUS Lim>M
(driving load) clockwise / motor
Catch a spinning motor BUS voltage limit /
27 Fly. RESTART 24 DC BUS Lim>G
restart clockwise / generator
OP
BUS voltage limit /
Start. DELAY Delay before starting DC BUS Lim<M counter-clockwise /
motor
Delay before Delay before Catch a
29 BUS voltage limit /
spinning motor
26 DC BUS Lim<G counter-clockwise /
Mains voltage < Mini- generator
mum voltage
rd READY Drive healthy

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
LED 10.97 HMI message Reason for alarm
Value Name Meaning
Code LVRT
Autotune
16
BOARDS TEST Test of boards
(control/interface) The main program stack over
21 Stack overload
POWER TEST Test of the power
re Rise time of Rise time of the electronic card

(Regen drives) 22
supply voltage supply voltage is too long
Fr Emergency operation
OP. enabled
7.4 - Tripping on a fault
7.3 - Alarms If the drive trips, the drive output bridge is inactive, and the
drive no longer controls the motor.
Alarms may appear during drive operation. When a trip is active, the LEDs present on the control board
These alarms are for information only, in order to warn the display alternately «t.r.» and a number that can be used to
user: the drive continues to operate but may switch to fault identify the active trip (see left-hand column in the table
mode if no corrective action is taken. below). For trips numbered higher than 100, only the last 2
digits are displayed with a point displayed on both LEDs to
On the drive control board, 2 LEDs display alternately «A.L.» indicate the hundred.
and a number that can be used to identify the alarm by means Example:
of the table below (this number corresponds to the value of
parameter 10.97). / : indicates trip no. 1
10.97 HMI message Reason for alarm

/ : indicates trip no. 101
1 User alarm 1 See 10.54
After consulting the table, follow the procedure below:
2 User alarm 2 See 10.55 - Make sure that the drive is disabled (STO-1 and STO-2
See 10.56 terminals open)
- Isolate the drive power supply
4 User alarm 4 See 10.57
- Carry out the necessary checks in order to eliminate
Braking the reason for the trip
See 10.12 - Activate the STO-1 and STO-2 inputs to cancel the trip
resistor alarm
Motor
6 See 10.17
overload alarm at the top of the screen.
Drive over All the trips indicated on the keypad or parameter-setting
7 temperature See 10.18 interface are listed in the table hereafter.
alarm
Opening and then closing the STO-1/STO-2 drive
Micro-controller enable terminals may cancel the trip. If the Run
overload FWD or Run reverse terminal is closed at the
time of resetting, the motor may or may not start
immediately, depending on the setting of Ctr.06 (06.04).
In emergency operation, trips re-
Emergency
10 lated to the software are disabled
run: hidden trip
and this alarm is generated.
After an autotune (05.12 = 1 or
2) the alarm is triggered if the dif-
Autotune:
ference between the measured
11 measured
value of the inductance Ld and
inductance
After an autotune (05.12 = 2) the

Autotune: alarm is triggered if the diffe-
12 measured rence between the measured
EMF
Autotune: no After an autotune (05.12

offset on this alarm is triggered if no top zero
encoder is detected

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
No. HMI message Reason for trip Solution
DC bus - Check the input fuses

1
UnderVoltage - Check the quality of the power supply (voltage dips)
- Check that the mains voltage is within the permitted

tolerance
DC bus - Check the quality of the power supply (commutation notches
2
overvoltage
- Check the motor insulation

Instantaneous output current exceeds - Perform a power module test (17.03) by switching off and
2.22 times the VSD rated current for on the drive (the drive should be fully de-energize before
normal duty use. switching back on)
Overcurrent - Check the motor insulation (megger the motor)
This trip cannot be reset for a period - Check the motor cables (connections and insulation)
of 10 seconds. - Check the belt tension in the case of a belt drive
- Check the quality of the mains supply
Braking IGBT transistor overcurrent
(POWERDRIVE MD2 only). - Check the braking resistor wiring and insulation level.
4 Brak. IGBT This trip cannot be reset for a period - Make sure that the resistor ohmic value is compatible with
of 10 seconds. the MD TF option used.
- Perform a power module test (17.03) by switching off and

on the drive (the drive should be fully de-energize before
I imbalance switching back on)
duty use. - Check the motor insulation (megger the motor)
- Check the cable insulation
- Check the motor cables

6 Out phase lost
- Check that a motor phase is not open
01.06) or - Check the drive settings

7 Overspeed (01.06 + 1000 rpm) - Disable the catch a spinning motor function (Set 06.09 to
«Disabled»)
Ixt drive The integration of VSD overloads - Check the application

overload exceeds the allowed value - Check the ambient temperature
- Megger the motor

9 IGBT U Internal protection of phase U IGBTs - Perform a power module test (17.03) by switching off and
switching back on)
-
-
- Check that the cabinet air inlet temperature is not outside
10 the maximum allowed the limits
Overheating
before switching back on)

The measured position does not vary
- Check the encoder wiring
11 Encoder rotation
is present) - Check that the motor shaft turns
The encoder U, V, W signals are

Tune UVW reversed (only if encoder option is - Check the conformity of the encoder wiring
reversed
present)
Tune U encoder
14
missing
During the autotune phase, one of - Check the encoder wiring
Tune V encoder the encoder U, V or W commutation
- Check the encoder connections
missing
channels is not present - Change the encoder
Tune W encoder
16
missing

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
A stop command has been given during

Autotune trip the autotune phase. Repeat the autotune procedure (see 05.12)
Parameter 10.39 «Braking energy - Check the settings of 10.30 and 10.31
Ixt braking overload accumulator» has reached
19 - Check the resistor is compatible with the application
resistor overload
requirements
-
- Check the drive ventilation units are working correctly
- Check that the product air inlet temperature is not outside
IGBT U Overheating of phase U IGBTs the limits
21
Overheating - Check that the motor shaft is not stalled
switching back on)
The motor temperature sensor indicates - Check the ambient temperature around the motor
Motor PTC a temperature that exceeds the
24 - Check that the motor current is less than the stated current
sensor maximum allowed - Check the thermal sensor wiring
Overload on the +24 V power supply or - Check the I/O wiring

Overload
26 digital outputs - Set 17.01 = Yes (1) to perform a control and interface board
+ 24V
test.
AI2 loss analog input AI2
Check the input wiring and source
29
Loss of communication on the P2 - Check the cable connections

COM loss connector serial link - Check that parameter 11.63 is compatible with the timing of
requests from the master
- Change the control board
EEPROM fail. exceeded (>1,000,000) - Check the recurrence of write cycles from the drive
controller
Stator Trip during measurement of the
stator resistance - Check the motor wiring
resistance
-
Fieldbus loss operation or timing error - Check that parameter 15.07 is compatible with the timing of
requests from the master
Simultaneous opening of both STO (Safe
STO inputs Torque Off) inputs during operation Check the remote control link
One of the encoder feedback data items - Check the encoder wiring
Encoder break is missing - Check the encoder connections
- parameters are compatible with the
Control failure of synchronous motor in values on the motor nameplate
Breakdown
- If reverse direction is needed, check that bipolar reference
is enabled (01.10 set to Yes (1))
The control board fails to communicate
40 Encoder board with the encoder board Change the encoder board
41 User 1 User trip 1 triggered by 10.61. See 10.61

10.65. See 10.65
10.38 See 10.38, 10.37

46 User 6 10.38 = 46 See 10.38, 10.37

4617 en - 2020.07 / h

47 User 7 10.38 = 47 See 10.38, 10.37
10.38 See 10.38, 10.37

49 User 9 10.38 = 49 See 10.38, 10.37

User 10 10.38 See 10.38, 10.37
DO2 MDX-IO The DO2 output load current (MDX-IO

over ld option) is >200 mA - Check that DO2 is not short-circuited
- Set 17.01 = Yes (1) to perform a control and interface board
test.
over ld option) is >200 mA
Communication problem between the

MDX-IO link drive and the MDX-IO option Check the MDX-IO option mounting
Internal Communication problem between the

drives Check the setting of 11.66
serial link
Unstable DC - Check the balancing of the mains phases
bus -
IGBT V Internal protection of phase V IGBTs - Megger the motor
IGBT W Internal protection of phase W IGBTs
switching back on)
-
Th Overheating of phase V IGBTs - Check the drive ventilation units are working correctly
IGBT V - Check that the product air inlet temperature is not outside
the limits
-
that the current levels depending on the frequency have
been complied with
Th - Refer to drive installation manual, section of derating at low
Overheating of phase W IGBTs frequency
IGBT W
- Check that the switching frequency 05.18 is compatible with
the motor current level
- Check that the motor shaft is not stalled
Problem detected during the control and
interface boards test, the power test or - Check that the STO1 and STO2 inputs are closed
60
during the self-test - See diagnostic error table
Inconsistency The STO1 and STO2 inputs have had a

between STO different state for more than 100 ms Check the remote control link for the STO1 and STO2 inputs
inputs
- Check the I/O wiring
10V over ld Overload on the +10 V power supply - Set 17.01 = Yes (1) to perform a control and interface board
test.
- Check that DO1 is not short-circuited
66 DO1 over ld The DO1 output load current is >200 mA - Set 17.01 = Yes (1) to perform a control and interface board
test.
The current has exceeded the limit
Motor programmed in 05.55. The load is too Check that 05.55 is consistent with the application
overcurrent high for the setting.
- Check the MDX-I/O option I/O wiring

24V MDX-IO The 24 V load current is too high
69 - Set 17.01 = Yes (1) to perform a control and interface board
over ld
test.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
AI4 loss on Loss of the current reference on analog

70 input AI4 of the MDX-IO option
MDX-IO
Check the input wiring and source of the MDX-IO option
71
MDX-IO
The grid voltage has dropped below the - Change the LVRT pattern parameters
LVRT
- Check the quality of the power supply
The grid voltage has exceeded the -
79
- Check the quality of the power supply
Loss of AC supply • Check the input fuses

101
• Check the quality of the power supply (voltage dips)
the serial link to the Regen inverter (see MD2R: Check the Regen inverter. See 18.24.
102
11.66).

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
8 - MAINTENANCE
For servicing instructions and a list of spare parts that may be needed, refer to the Maintenance section in the POWERDRIVE installation
manual.

4617 en - 2020.07 / h
4617 en - 2020.07 / h
4617 en - 2020.07 / h
IMP297NO610 / 4879875
Moteurs Leroy-Somer
www.leroy-somer.com

Powerdrive MD2: Commissioning Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powerdrive MD2: Commissioning Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Powerdrive MD2: Commissioning Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Commissioning manual

Référence : 4617 en - 2020.07 / h

Manual corresponding to software versions higher than or equal to 5.80

2 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

The variable speed drives contain parts which are sensitive to

be observed. This manual is to be given to the end user.

components during transportation and handling. Avoid

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 3

5 - ADVANCED PARAMETER-SETTING MODE .................................................................................................... 46

Menu 1: Speed references and limitations .................................................................................................

Menu 4: Current loop - Torque control ........................................................................................................ 67

4 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

Menu 6: Programmable logic and counters ................................................................................................

Menu 10: Trip management drive states ................................................................................................ 107

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 5

6.4 - MODBUS RTU ........................................................................................................................................ 167

6 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

2 - PARAMETER-SETTING 2.2 - Interface architecture

- Trip history: Gives a quick overview of the last 10 drive trips.

- : This button is accessible on all screens in factory-set

B At any time and regardless of the screen displayed, the

After 10 minutes without activity on the display, it returns to

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 7

Previous page Next page

List of parameters displayed in Reading mode

8 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

- «Advanced setting»: Provides read and/or write access to

Choice of Menu Choice of Parameter No.

For a more detailed explanation of the menus and parameters

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 9

Cancel the entry if

Menu No. Parameter,

Choice of Menu (01 to 21) Choice of Parameter No.

- The value of the Read/Write parameters is displayed in a

For a more detailed explanation of the menus and parameters

Code 149 is the default code. To modify it, refer to parameter

10 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

Cancel the entry if

Loading progress bars

Choice of file to be saved

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 11

Select the file to

The settings are stored in

... and correspond

Parameter set no. 1 has

12 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

must not be connected to the 24V.

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 13

Cancel the entry if you make a mistake

14 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

1 2 use the keypad

The stylus should then be positioned at several points

• Setting the screen brightness

Click on the plus sign to increase the brightness or the minus

Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2 15

Speed reference commands can be activated using the

To clear a trip: resolve the problem, then press the Stop/Reset

16 Commissioning manual Powerdrive MD2

and is used to give a stop command or reset the drive.